1.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK 2 3****************** 4Variables Glossary 5****************** 6 7This chapter lists common variables used in the OpenEmbedded build 8system and gives an overview of their function and contents. 9 10:term:`A <ABIEXTENSION>` :term:`B` :term:`C <CACHE>` 11:term:`D` :term:`E <EFI_PROVIDER>` :term:`F <FEATURE_PACKAGES>` 12:term:`G <GCCPIE>` :term:`H <HOMEPAGE>` :term:`I <ICECC_DISABLED>` 13:term:`K <KARCH>` :term:`L <LABELS>` :term:`M <MACHINE>` 14:term:`N <NATIVELSBSTRING>` :term:`O <OBJCOPY>` :term:`P` 15:term:`R <RANLIB>` :term:`S` :term:`T` 16:term:`U <UBOOT_CONFIG>` :term:`V <VOLATILE_LOG_DIR>` 17:term:`W <WARN_QA>` :term:`X <XSERVER>` 18 19.. glossary:: 20 21 :term:`ABIEXTENSION` 22 Extension to the Application Binary Interface (ABI) field of the GNU 23 canonical architecture name (e.g. "eabi"). 24 25 ABI extensions are set in the machine include files. For example, the 26 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc`` file sets the 27 following extension: 28 :: 29 30 ABIEXTENSION = "eabi" 31 32 :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` 33 Specifies whether to produce an output package even if it is empty. 34 By default, BitBake does not produce empty packages. This default 35 behavior can cause issues when there is an 36 :term:`RDEPENDS` or some other hard runtime 37 requirement on the existence of the package. 38 39 Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in 40 conjunction with a package name override, as in: 41 :: 42 43 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN} = "1" 44 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1" 45 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-staticdev = "1" 46 47 :term:`ALTERNATIVE` 48 Lists commands in a package that need an alternative binary naming 49 scheme. Sometimes the same command is provided in multiple packages. 50 When this occurs, the OpenEmbedded build system needs to use the 51 alternatives system to create a different binary naming scheme so the 52 commands can co-exist. 53 54 To use the variable, list out the package's commands that also exist 55 as part of another package. For example, if the ``busybox`` package 56 has four commands that also exist as part of another package, you 57 identify them as follows: 58 :: 59 60 ALTERNATIVE_busybox = "sh sed test bracket" 61 62 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 63 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 64 section. 65 66 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` 67 Used by the alternatives system to map duplicated commands to actual 68 locations. For example, if the ``bracket`` command provided by the 69 ``busybox`` package is duplicated through another package, you must 70 use the ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` variable to specify the actual 71 location: 72 :: 73 74 ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME[bracket] = "/usr/bin/[" 75 76 In this example, the binary for the ``bracket`` command (i.e. ``[``) 77 from the ``busybox`` package resides in ``/usr/bin/``. 78 79 .. note:: 80 81 If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` is not defined, it defaults to ``${bindir}/name``. 82 83 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 84 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 85 section. 86 87 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY` 88 Used by the alternatives system to create default priorities for 89 duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single 90 default regardless of the command name or package, a default for 91 specific duplicated commands regardless of the package, or a default 92 for specific commands tied to particular packages. Here are the 93 available syntax forms: 94 :: 95 96 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY = "priority" 97 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY[name] = "priority" 98 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY_pkg[name] = "priority" 99 100 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 101 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 102 section. 103 104 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_TARGET` 105 Used by the alternatives system to create default link locations for 106 duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single 107 default location for all duplicated commands regardless of the 108 command name or package, a default for specific duplicated commands 109 regardless of the package, or a default for specific commands tied to 110 particular packages. Here are the available syntax forms: 111 :: 112 113 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET = "target" 114 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET[name] = "target" 115 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET_pkg[name] = "target" 116 117 .. note:: 118 119 If ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` is not defined, it inherits the value 120 from the :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` variable. 121 122 If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` and ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` are the 123 same, the target for ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` has "``.{BPN}``" 124 appended to it. 125 126 Finally, if the file referenced has not been renamed, the 127 alternatives system will rename it to avoid the need to rename 128 alternative files in the :ref:`ref-tasks-install` 129 task while retaining support for the command if necessary. 130 131 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 132 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 133 section. 134 135 :term:`ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES` 136 When inheriting the 137 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 138 class, this variable identifies a list of distribution features where 139 at least one must be enabled in the current configuration in order 140 for the OpenEmbedded build system to build the recipe. In other words, 141 if none of the features listed in ``ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES`` 142 appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 143 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 144 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 145 146 147 :term:`APPEND` 148 An override list of append strings for each target specified with 149 :term:`LABELS`. 150 151 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 152 information on how this variable is used. 153 154 :term:`AR` 155 The minimal command and arguments used to run ``ar``. 156 157 :term:`ARCHIVER_MODE` 158 When used with the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class, 159 determines the type of information used to create a released archive. 160 You can use this variable to create archives of patched source, 161 original source, configured source, and so forth by employing the 162 following variable flags (varflags): 163 :: 164 165 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original" # Uses original (unpacked) source files. 166 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "patched" # Uses patched source files. This is the default. 167 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "configured" # Uses configured source files. 168 ARCHIVER_MODE[diff] = "1" # Uses patches between do_unpack and do_patch. 169 ARCHIVER_MODE[diff-exclude] ?= "file file ..." # Lists files and directories to exclude from diff. 170 ARCHIVER_MODE[dumpdata] = "1" # Uses environment data. 171 ARCHIVER_MODE[recipe] = "1" # Uses recipe and include files. 172 ARCHIVER_MODE[srpm] = "1" # Uses RPM package files. 173 174 For information on how the variable works, see the 175 ``meta/classes/archiver.bbclass`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`. 176 177 :term:`AS` 178 Minimal command and arguments needed to run the assembler. 179 180 :term:`ASSUME_PROVIDED` 181 Lists recipe names (:term:`PN` values) BitBake does not 182 attempt to build. Instead, BitBake assumes these recipes have already 183 been built. 184 185 In OpenEmbedded-Core, ``ASSUME_PROVIDED`` mostly specifies native 186 tools that should not be built. An example is ``git-native``, which 187 when specified, allows for the Git binary from the host to be used 188 rather than building ``git-native``. 189 190 :term:`ASSUME_SHLIBS` 191 Provides additional ``shlibs`` provider mapping information, which 192 adds to or overwrites the information provided automatically by the 193 system. Separate multiple entries using spaces. 194 195 As an example, use the following form to add an ``shlib`` provider of 196 shlibname in packagename with the optional version: 197 :: 198 199 shlibname:packagename[_version] 200 201 Here is an example that adds a shared library named ``libEGL.so.1`` 202 as being provided by the ``libegl-implementation`` package: 203 :: 204 205 ASSUME_SHLIBS = "libEGL.so.1:libegl-implementation" 206 207 :term:`AUTHOR` 208 The email address used to contact the original author or authors in 209 order to send patches and forward bugs. 210 211 :term:`AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS` 212 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 213 which is the default behavior, ``AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS`` specifies which 214 packages should be checked for libraries and renamed according to 215 Debian library package naming. 216 217 The default value is "${PACKAGES}", which causes the debian class to 218 act on all packages that are explicitly generated by the recipe. 219 220 :term:`AUTO_SYSLINUXMENU` 221 Enables creating an automatic menu for the syslinux bootloader. You 222 must set this variable in your recipe. The 223 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks this variable. 224 225 :term:`AUTOREV` 226 When ``SRCREV`` is set to the value of this variable, it specifies to 227 use the latest source revision in the repository. Here is an example: 228 :: 229 230 SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}" 231 232 If you use the previous statement to retrieve the latest version of 233 software, you need to be sure :term:`PV` contains 234 ``${``\ :term:`SRCPV`\ ``}``. For example, suppose you 235 have a kernel recipe that inherits the 236 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class and you use the previous 237 statement. In this example, ``${SRCPV}`` does not automatically get 238 into ``PV``. Consequently, you need to change ``PV`` in your recipe 239 so that it does contain ``${SRCPV}``. 240 241 For more information see the 242 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`" 243 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 244 245 :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` 246 List of licenses found in the directories specified by 247 :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` and 248 :term:`LICENSE_PATH`. 249 250 .. note:: 251 252 It is assumed that all changes to ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` and 253 ``LICENSE_PATH`` have been done before ``AVAILABLE_LICENSES`` 254 is defined (in :ref:`ref-classes-license`). 255 256 :term:`AVAILTUNES` 257 The list of defined CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) 258 tunings (i.e. "tunes") available for use by the OpenEmbedded build 259 system. 260 261 The list simply presents the tunes that are available. Not all tunes 262 may be compatible with a particular machine configuration, or with 263 each other in a 264 :ref:`Multilib <dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image>` 265 configuration. 266 267 To add a tune to the list, be sure to append it with spaces using the 268 "+=" BitBake operator. Do not simply replace the list by using the 269 "=" operator. See the 270 ":ref:`Basic Syntax <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:basic syntax>`" section in the BitBake 271 User Manual for more information. 272 273 :term:`B` 274 The directory within the :term:`Build Directory` in 275 which the OpenEmbedded build system places generated objects during a 276 recipe's build process. By default, this directory is the same as the 277 :term:`S` directory, which is defined as: 278 :: 279 280 S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}" 281 282 You can separate the (``S``) directory and the directory pointed to 283 by the ``B`` variable. Most Autotools-based recipes support 284 separating these directories. The build system defaults to using 285 separate directories for ``gcc`` and some kernel recipes. 286 287 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` 288 Lists "recommended-only" packages to not install. Recommended-only 289 packages are packages installed only through the 290 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable. You can prevent any 291 of these "recommended" packages from being installed by listing them 292 with the ``BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable: 293 :: 294 295 BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS = "package_name package_name package_name ..." 296 297 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 298 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 299 override: 300 :: 301 302 BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "package_name" 303 304 It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages 305 using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them 306 (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS` 307 variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and 308 will install the packages to avoid dependency errors. 309 310 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 311 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 312 313 See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the 314 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for related 315 information. 316 317 :term:`BASE_LIB` 318 The library directory name for the CPU or Application Binary 319 Interface (ABI) tune. The ``BASE_LIB`` applies only in the Multilib 320 context. See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image`" 321 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information 322 on Multilib. 323 324 The ``BASE_LIB`` variable is defined in the machine include files in 325 the :term:`Source Directory`. If Multilib is not 326 being used, the value defaults to "lib". 327 328 :term:`BASE_WORKDIR` 329 Points to the base of the work directory for all recipes. The default 330 value is "${TMPDIR}/work". 331 332 :term:`BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS` 333 Specifies a space-delimited list of hosts that the fetcher is allowed 334 to use to obtain the required source code. Following are 335 considerations surrounding this variable: 336 337 - This host list is only used if ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` is either not set 338 or set to "0". 339 340 - Limited support for wildcard matching against the beginning of 341 host names exists. For example, the following setting matches 342 ``git.gnu.org``, ``ftp.gnu.org``, and ``foo.git.gnu.org``. 343 :: 344 345 BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS = "*.gnu.org" 346 347 .. note:: 348 349 The use of the "``*``" character only works at the beginning of 350 a host name and it must be isolated from the remainder of the 351 host name. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other 352 location of the name or combined with the front part of the 353 name. 354 355 For example, ``*.foo.bar`` is supported, while ``*aa.foo.bar`` 356 is not. 357 358 - Mirrors not in the host list are skipped and logged in debug. 359 360 - Attempts to access networks not in the host list cause a failure. 361 362 Using ``BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS`` in conjunction with 363 :term:`PREMIRRORS` is very useful. Adding the host 364 you want to use to ``PREMIRRORS`` results in the source code being 365 fetched from an allowed location and avoids raising an error when a 366 host that is not allowed is in a :term:`SRC_URI` 367 statement. This is because the fetcher does not attempt to use the 368 host listed in ``SRC_URI`` after a successful fetch from the 369 ``PREMIRRORS`` occurs. 370 371 :term:`BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY` 372 Defines how BitBake handles situations where an append file 373 (``.bbappend``) has no corresponding recipe file (``.bb``). This 374 condition often occurs when layers get out of sync (e.g. ``oe-core`` 375 bumps a recipe version and the old recipe no longer exists and the 376 other layer has not been updated to the new version of the recipe 377 yet). 378 379 The default fatal behavior is safest because it is the sane reaction 380 given something is out of sync. It is important to realize when your 381 changes are no longer being applied. 382 383 You can change the default behavior by setting this variable to "1", 384 "yes", or "true" in your ``local.conf`` file, which is located in the 385 :term:`Build Directory`: Here is an example: 386 :: 387 388 BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY = "1" 389 390 :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS` 391 Monitors disk space and available inodes during the build and allows 392 you to control the build based on these parameters. 393 394 Disk space monitoring is disabled by default. To enable monitoring, 395 add the ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` variable to your ``conf/local.conf`` file 396 found in the :term:`Build Directory`. Use the 397 following form: 398 399 .. code-block:: none 400 401 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "action,dir,threshold [...]" 402 403 where: 404 405 action is: 406 ABORT: Immediately abort the build when 407 a threshold is broken. 408 STOPTASKS: Stop the build after the currently 409 executing tasks have finished when 410 a threshold is broken. 411 WARN: Issue a warning but continue the 412 build when a threshold is broken. 413 Subsequent warnings are issued as 414 defined by the BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL 415 variable, which must be defined in 416 the conf/local.conf file. 417 418 dir is: 419 Any directory you choose. You can specify one or 420 more directories to monitor by separating the 421 groupings with a space. If two directories are 422 on the same device, only the first directory 423 is monitored. 424 425 threshold is: 426 Either the minimum available disk space, 427 the minimum number of free inodes, or 428 both. You must specify at least one. To 429 omit one or the other, simply omit the value. 430 Specify the threshold using G, M, K for Gbytes, 431 Mbytes, and Kbytes, respectively. If you do 432 not specify G, M, or K, Kbytes is assumed by 433 default. Do not use GB, MB, or KB. 434 435 Here are some examples: 436 :: 437 438 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},1G,100K WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K" 439 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "STOPTASKS,${TMPDIR},1G" 440 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},,100K" 441 442 The first example works only if you also provide the 443 :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL` 444 variable in the ``conf/local.conf``. This example causes the build 445 system to immediately abort when either the disk space in 446 ``${TMPDIR}`` drops below 1 Gbyte or the available free inodes drops 447 below 100 Kbytes. Because two directories are provided with the 448 variable, the build system also issue a warning when the disk space 449 in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` directory drops below 1 Gbyte or the number 450 of free inodes drops below 100 Kbytes. Subsequent warnings are issued 451 during intervals as defined by the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` 452 variable. 453 454 The second example stops the build after all currently executing 455 tasks complete when the minimum disk space in the ``${TMPDIR}`` 456 directory drops below 1 Gbyte. No disk monitoring occurs for the free 457 inodes in this case. 458 459 The final example immediately aborts the build when the number of 460 free inodes in the ``${TMPDIR}`` directory drops below 100 Kbytes. No 461 disk space monitoring for the directory itself occurs in this case. 462 463 :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL` 464 Defines the disk space and free inode warning intervals. To set these 465 intervals, define the variable in your ``conf/local.conf`` file in 466 the :term:`Build Directory`. 467 468 If you are going to use the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable, you 469 must also use the :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS` 470 variable and define its action as "WARN". During the build, 471 subsequent warnings are issued each time disk space or number of free 472 inodes further reduces by the respective interval. 473 474 If you do not provide a ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable and you 475 do use ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` with the "WARN" action, the disk 476 monitoring interval defaults to the following: 477 :: 478 479 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K" 480 481 When specifying the variable in your configuration file, use the 482 following form: 483 484 .. code-block:: none 485 486 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "disk_space_interval,disk_inode_interval" 487 488 where: 489 490 disk_space_interval is: 491 An interval of memory expressed in either 492 G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes, 493 respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB. 494 495 disk_inode_interval is: 496 An interval of free inodes expressed in either 497 G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes, 498 respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB. 499 500 Here is an example: 501 :: 502 503 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K" 504 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K" 505 506 These variables cause the 507 OpenEmbedded build system to issue subsequent warnings each time the 508 available disk space further reduces by 50 Mbytes or the number of 509 free inodes further reduces by 5 Kbytes in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` 510 directory. Subsequent warnings based on the interval occur each time 511 a respective interval is reached beyond the initial warning (i.e. 1 512 Gbytes and 100 Kbytes). 513 514 :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS` 515 Causes tarballs of the source control repositories (e.g. Git 516 repositories), including metadata, to be placed in the 517 :term:`DL_DIR` directory. 518 519 For performance reasons, creating and placing tarballs of these 520 repositories is not the default action by the OpenEmbedded build 521 system. 522 :: 523 524 BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1" 525 526 Set this variable in your 527 ``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`. 528 529 Once you have the tarballs containing your source files, you can 530 clean up your ``DL_DIR`` directory by deleting any Git or other 531 source control work directories. 532 533 :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS` 534 The maximum number of tasks BitBake should run in parallel at any one 535 time. The OpenEmbedded build system automatically configures this 536 variable to be equal to the number of cores on the build system. For 537 example, a system with a dual core processor that also uses 538 hyper-threading causes the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable to default 539 to "4". 540 541 For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to 542 override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds. 543 However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical 544 CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable 545 is not set higher than "20". 546 547 For more information on speeding up builds, see the 548 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`" 549 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 550 551 :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT` 552 Specifies the time (in seconds) after which to unload the BitBake 553 server due to inactivity. Set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to determine how 554 long the BitBake server stays resident between invocations. 555 556 For example, the following statement in your ``local.conf`` file 557 instructs the server to be unloaded after 20 seconds of inactivity: 558 :: 559 560 BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT = "20" 561 562 If you want the server to never be unloaded, 563 set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to "-1". 564 565 :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` 566 Allows you to extend a recipe so that it builds variants of the 567 software. Common variants for recipes exist such as "natives" like 568 ``quilt-native``, which is a copy of Quilt built to run on the build 569 system; "crosses" such as ``gcc-cross``, which is a compiler built to 570 run on the build machine but produces binaries that run on the target 571 :term:`MACHINE`; "nativesdk", which targets the SDK 572 machine instead of ``MACHINE``; and "mulitlibs" in the form 573 "``multilib:``\ multilib_name". 574 575 To build a different variant of the recipe with a minimal amount of 576 code, it usually is as simple as adding the following to your recipe: 577 :: 578 579 BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "native nativesdk" 580 BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "multilib:multilib_name" 581 582 .. note:: 583 584 Internally, the ``BBCLASSEXTEND`` mechanism generates recipe 585 variants by rewriting variable values and applying overrides such 586 as ``_class-native``. For example, to generate a native version of 587 a recipe, a :term:`DEPENDS` on "foo" is rewritten 588 to a ``DEPENDS`` on "foo-native". 589 590 Even when using ``BBCLASSEXTEND``, the recipe is only parsed once. 591 Parsing once adds some limitations. For example, it is not 592 possible to include a different file depending on the variant, 593 since ``include`` statements are processed when the recipe is 594 parsed. 595 596 :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS` 597 Lists the names of configured layers. These names are used to find 598 the other ``BBFILE_*`` variables. Typically, each layer will append 599 its name to this variable in its ``conf/layer.conf`` file. 600 601 :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN` 602 Variable that expands to match files from 603 :term:`BBFILES` in a particular layer. This variable 604 is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the 605 name of the specific layer (e.g. ``BBFILE_PATTERN_emenlow``). 606 607 :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` 608 Assigns the priority for recipe files in each layer. 609 610 This variable is useful in situations where the same recipe appears 611 in more than one layer. Setting this variable allows you to 612 prioritize a layer against other layers that contain the same recipe 613 - effectively letting you control the precedence for the multiple 614 layers. The precedence established through this variable stands 615 regardless of a recipe's version (:term:`PV` variable). For 616 example, a layer that has a recipe with a higher ``PV`` value but for 617 which the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` is set to have a lower precedence still 618 has a lower precedence. 619 620 A larger value for the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable results in a 621 higher precedence. For example, the value 6 has a higher precedence 622 than the value 5. If not specified, the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable 623 is set based on layer dependencies (see the ``LAYERDEPENDS`` variable 624 for more information. The default priority, if unspecified for a 625 layer with no dependencies, is the lowest defined priority + 1 (or 1 626 if no priorities are defined). 627 628 .. tip:: 629 630 You can use the command ``bitbake-layers show-layers`` 631 to list all configured layers along with their priorities. 632 633 :term:`BBFILES` 634 A space-separated list of recipe files BitBake uses to build 635 software. 636 637 When specifying recipe files, you can pattern match using Python's 638 `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ syntax. 639 For details on the syntax, see the documentation by following the 640 previous link. 641 642 :term:`BBFILES_DYNAMIC` 643 Activates content when identified layers are present. You identify 644 the layers by the collections that the layers define. 645 646 Use the ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC`` variable to avoid ``.bbappend`` files 647 whose corresponding ``.bb`` file is in a layer that attempts to 648 modify other layers through ``.bbappend`` but does not want to 649 introduce a hard dependency on those other layers. 650 651 Use the following form for ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC``: 652 collection_name:filename_pattern The following example identifies two 653 collection names and two filename patterns: 654 :: 655 656 BBFILES_DYNAMIC += " \ 657 clang-layer:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/meta-clang/*/*/*.bbappend \ 658 core:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend \ 659 " 660 661 This next example shows an error message that occurs because invalid 662 entries are found, which cause parsing to abort: 663 664 .. code-block:: none 665 666 ERROR: BBFILES_DYNAMIC entries must be of the form <collection name>:<filename pattern>, not: 667 /work/my-layer/bbappends/meta-security-isafw/*/*/*.bbappend 668 /work/my-layer/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend 669 670 :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` 671 Variable that controls how BitBake displays logs on build failure. 672 673 :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES` 674 If :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` is set, specifies the 675 maximum number of lines from the task log file to print when 676 reporting a failed task. If you do not set ``BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES``, 677 the entire log is printed. 678 679 :term:`BBLAYERS` 680 Lists the layers to enable during the build. This variable is defined 681 in the ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file in the :term:`Build Directory`. 682 Here is an example: 683 :: 684 685 BBLAYERS = " \ 686 /home/scottrif/poky/meta \ 687 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky \ 688 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \ 689 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-mykernel \ 690 " 691 692 This example enables four layers, one of which is a custom, 693 user-defined layer named ``meta-mykernel``. 694 695 :term:`BBMASK` 696 Prevents BitBake from processing recipes and recipe append files. 697 698 You can use the ``BBMASK`` variable to "hide" these ``.bb`` and 699 ``.bbappend`` files. BitBake ignores any recipe or recipe append 700 files that match any of the expressions. It is as if BitBake does not 701 see them at all. Consequently, matching files are not parsed or 702 otherwise used by BitBake. 703 704 The values you provide are passed to Python's regular expression 705 compiler. Consequently, the syntax follows Python's Regular 706 Expression (re) syntax. The expressions are compared against the full 707 paths to the files. For complete syntax information, see Python's 708 documentation at https://docs.python.org/3/library/re.html#regular-expression-syntax. 709 710 The following example uses a complete regular expression to tell 711 BitBake to ignore all recipe and recipe append files in the 712 ``meta-ti/recipes-misc/`` directory: 713 :: 714 715 BBMASK = "meta-ti/recipes-misc/" 716 717 If you want to mask out multiple directories or recipes, you can 718 specify multiple regular expression fragments. This next example 719 masks out multiple directories and individual recipes: :: 720 721 BBMASK += "/meta-ti/recipes-misc/ meta-ti/recipes-ti/packagegroup/" 722 BBMASK += "/meta-oe/recipes-support/" 723 BBMASK += "/meta-foo/.*/openldap" 724 BBMASK += "opencv.*\.bbappend" 725 BBMASK += "lzma" 726 727 .. note:: 728 729 When specifying a directory name, use the trailing slash character 730 to ensure you match just that directory name. 731 732 :term:`BBMULTICONFIG` 733 Specifies each additional separate configuration when you are 734 building targets with multiple configurations. Use this variable in 735 your ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file. Specify a 736 multiconfigname for each configuration file you are using. For 737 example, the following line specifies three configuration files: 738 :: 739 740 BBMULTICONFIG = "configA configB configC" 741 742 Each configuration file you 743 use must reside in the :term:`Build Directory` 744 ``conf/multiconfig`` directory (e.g. 745 build_directory\ ``/conf/multiconfig/configA.conf``). 746 747 For information on how to use ``BBMULTICONFIG`` in an environment 748 that supports building targets with multiple configurations, see the 749 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building images for multiple targets using multiple configurations`" 750 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 751 752 :term:`BBPATH` 753 Used by BitBake to locate ``.bbclass`` and configuration files. This 754 variable is analogous to the ``PATH`` variable. 755 756 .. note:: 757 758 If you run BitBake from a directory outside of the 759 Build Directory 760 , you must be sure to set 761 BBPATH 762 to point to the Build Directory. Set the variable as you would any 763 environment variable and then run BitBake: 764 :: 765 766 $ BBPATH = "build_directory" 767 $ export BBPATH 768 $ bitbake target 769 770 771 :term:`BBSERVER` 772 If defined in the BitBake environment, ``BBSERVER`` points to the 773 BitBake remote server. 774 775 Use the following format to export the variable to the BitBake 776 environment: 777 :: 778 779 export BBSERVER=localhost:$port 780 781 By default, ``BBSERVER`` also appears in 782 :term:`bitbake:BB_HASHBASE_WHITELIST`. 783 Consequently, ``BBSERVER`` is excluded from checksum and dependency 784 data. 785 786 :term:`BINCONFIG` 787 When inheriting the 788 :ref:`binconfig-disabled <ref-classes-binconfig-disabled>` class, 789 this variable specifies binary configuration scripts to disable in 790 favor of using ``pkg-config`` to query the information. The 791 ``binconfig-disabled`` class will modify the specified scripts to 792 return an error so that calls to them can be easily found and 793 replaced. 794 795 To add multiple scripts, separate them by spaces. Here is an example 796 from the ``libpng`` recipe: 797 :: 798 799 BINCONFIG = "${bindir}/libpng-config ${bindir}/libpng16-config" 800 801 :term:`BINCONFIG_GLOB` 802 When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class, 803 this variable specifies a wildcard for configuration scripts that 804 need editing. The scripts are edited to correct any paths that have 805 been set up during compilation so that they are correct for use when 806 installed into the sysroot and called by the build processes of other 807 recipes. 808 809 .. note:: 810 811 The ``BINCONFIG_GLOB`` variable uses 812 `shell globbing <https://tldp.org/LDP/abs/html/globbingref.html>`__, 813 which is recognition and expansion of wildcards during pattern 814 matching. Shell globbing is very similar to 815 `fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__ 816 and `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__. 817 818 For more information on how this variable works, see 819 ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 820 You can also find general 821 information on the class in the 822 ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section. 823 824 :term:`BP` 825 The base recipe name and version but without any special recipe name 826 suffix (i.e. ``-native``, ``lib64-``, and so forth). ``BP`` is 827 comprised of the following: 828 :: 829 830 ${BPN}-${PV} 831 832 :term:`BPN` 833 This variable is a version of the :term:`PN` variable with 834 common prefixes and suffixes removed, such as ``nativesdk-``, 835 ``-cross``, ``-native``, and multilib's ``lib64-`` and ``lib32-``. 836 The exact lists of prefixes and suffixes removed are specified by the 837 :term:`MLPREFIX` and 838 :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` variables, 839 respectively. 840 841 :term:`BUGTRACKER` 842 Specifies a URL for an upstream bug tracking website for a recipe. 843 The OpenEmbedded build system does not use this variable. Rather, the 844 variable is a useful pointer in case a bug in the software being 845 built needs to be manually reported. 846 847 :term:`BUILD_ARCH` 848 Specifies the architecture of the build host (e.g. ``i686``). The 849 OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of ``BUILD_ARCH`` from the 850 machine name reported by the ``uname`` command. 851 852 :term:`BUILD_AS_ARCH` 853 Specifies the architecture-specific assembler flags for the build 854 host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_AS_ARCH`` is empty. 855 856 :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` 857 Specifies the architecture-specific C compiler flags for the build 858 host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is empty. 859 860 :term:`BUILD_CCLD` 861 Specifies the linker command to be used for the build host when the C 862 compiler is being used as the linker. By default, ``BUILD_CCLD`` 863 points to GCC and passes as arguments the value of 864 :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming 865 ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set. 866 867 :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` 868 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 869 build host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 870 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 871 default. 872 873 :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` 874 Specifies the flags to pass to the C preprocessor (i.e. to both the C 875 and the C++ compilers) when building for the build host. When 876 building in the ``-native`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` 877 is set to the value of this variable by default. 878 879 :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` 880 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 881 build host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 882 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 883 by default. 884 885 :term:`BUILD_FC` 886 Specifies the Fortran compiler command for the build host. By 887 default, ``BUILD_FC`` points to Gfortran and passes as arguments the 888 value of :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming 889 ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set. 890 891 :term:`BUILD_LD` 892 Specifies the linker command for the build host. By default, 893 ``BUILD_LD`` points to the GNU linker (ld) and passes as arguments 894 the value of :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH`, assuming 895 ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is set. 896 897 :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH` 898 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the build host. By 899 default, the value of ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is empty. 900 901 :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` 902 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the build 903 host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 904 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 905 by default. 906 907 :term:`BUILD_OPTIMIZATION` 908 Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when 909 building for the build host or the SDK. The flags are passed through 910 the :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` and 911 :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` default values. 912 913 The default value of the ``BUILD_OPTIMIZATION`` variable is "-O2 914 -pipe". 915 916 :term:`BUILD_OS` 917 Specifies the operating system in use on the build host (e.g. 918 "linux"). The OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of 919 ``BUILD_OS`` from the OS reported by the ``uname`` command - the 920 first word, converted to lower-case characters. 921 922 :term:`BUILD_PREFIX` 923 The toolchain binary prefix used for native recipes. The OpenEmbedded 924 build system uses the ``BUILD_PREFIX`` value to set the 925 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building for 926 ``native`` recipes. 927 928 :term:`BUILD_STRIP` 929 Specifies the command to be used to strip debugging symbols from 930 binaries produced for the build host. By default, ``BUILD_STRIP`` 931 points to 932 ``${``\ :term:`BUILD_PREFIX`\ ``}strip``. 933 934 :term:`BUILD_SYS` 935 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 936 system, to use when building for the build host (i.e. when building 937 ``native`` recipes). 938 939 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 940 on :term:`BUILD_ARCH`, 941 :term:`BUILD_VENDOR`, and 942 :term:`BUILD_OS`. You do not need to set the 943 ``BUILD_SYS`` variable yourself. 944 945 :term:`BUILD_VENDOR` 946 Specifies the vendor name to use when building for the build host. 947 The default value is an empty string (""). 948 949 :term:`BUILDDIR` 950 Points to the location of the :term:`Build Directory`. 951 You can define this directory indirectly through the 952 :ref:`structure-core-script` script by passing in a Build 953 Directory path when you run the script. If you run the script and do 954 not provide a Build Directory path, the ``BUILDDIR`` defaults to 955 ``build`` in the current directory. 956 957 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` 958 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 959 class, this variable specifies whether or not to commit the build 960 history output in a local Git repository. If set to "1", this local 961 repository will be maintained automatically by the ``buildhistory`` 962 class and a commit will be created on every build for changes to each 963 top-level subdirectory of the build history output (images, packages, 964 and sdk). If you want to track changes to build history over time, 965 you should set this value to "1". 966 967 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class does not commit the build 968 history output in a local Git repository: 969 :: 970 971 BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT ?= "0" 972 973 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR` 974 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 975 class, this variable specifies the author to use for each Git commit. 976 In order for the ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable to work, the 977 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` variable must 978 be set to "1". 979 980 Git requires that the value you provide for the 981 ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable takes the form of "name 982 email@host". Providing an email address or host that is not valid 983 does not produce an error. 984 985 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows: 986 :: 987 988 BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR ?= "buildhistory <buildhistory@${DISTRO}>" 989 990 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_DIR` 991 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 992 class, this variable specifies the directory in which build history 993 information is kept. For more information on how the variable works, 994 see the ``buildhistory.class``. 995 996 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the directory as follows: 997 :: 998 999 BUILDHISTORY_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/buildhistory" 1000 1001 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES` 1002 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1003 class, this variable specifies the build history features to be 1004 enabled. For more information on how build history works, see the 1005 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:maintaining build output quality`" 1006 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 1007 1008 You can specify these features in the form of a space-separated list: 1009 1010 - *image:* Analysis of the contents of images, which includes the 1011 list of installed packages among other things. 1012 1013 - *package:* Analysis of the contents of individual packages. 1014 1015 - *sdk:* Analysis of the contents of the software development kit 1016 (SDK). 1017 1018 - *task:* Save output file signatures for 1019 :ref:`shared state <overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache>` 1020 (sstate) tasks. 1021 This saves one file per task and lists the SHA-256 checksums for 1022 each file staged (i.e. the output of the task). 1023 1024 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class enables the following 1025 features: 1026 :: 1027 1028 BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES ?= "image package sdk" 1029 1030 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES` 1031 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1032 class, this variable specifies a list of paths to files copied from 1033 the image contents into the build history directory under an 1034 "image-files" directory in the directory for the image, so that you 1035 can track the contents of each file. The default is to copy 1036 ``/etc/passwd`` and ``/etc/group``, which allows you to monitor for 1037 changes in user and group entries. You can modify the list to include 1038 any file. Specifying an invalid path does not produce an error. 1039 Consequently, you can include files that might not always be present. 1040 1041 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class provides paths to the 1042 following files: 1043 :: 1044 1045 BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES ?= "/etc/passwd /etc/group" 1046 1047 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO` 1048 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1049 class, this variable optionally specifies a remote repository to 1050 which build history pushes Git changes. In order for 1051 ``BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO`` to work, 1052 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` must be set to 1053 "1". 1054 1055 The repository should correspond to a remote address that specifies a 1056 repository as understood by Git, or alternatively to a remote name 1057 that you have set up manually using ``git remote`` within the local 1058 repository. 1059 1060 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows: 1061 :: 1062 1063 BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO ?= "" 1064 1065 :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` 1066 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 1067 SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1068 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 1069 default. 1070 1071 :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` 1072 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 1073 C and the C++ compilers) when building for the SDK. When building in 1074 the ``nativesdk-`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set 1075 to the value of this variable by default. 1076 1077 :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` 1078 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 1079 SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1080 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 1081 by default. 1082 1083 :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` 1084 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the SDK. 1085 When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1086 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 1087 by default. 1088 1089 :term:`BUILDSTATS_BASE` 1090 Points to the location of the directory that holds build statistics 1091 when you use and enable the 1092 :ref:`buildstats <ref-classes-buildstats>` class. The 1093 ``BUILDSTATS_BASE`` directory defaults to 1094 ``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/buildstats/``. 1095 1096 :term:`BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID` 1097 For the BusyBox recipe, specifies whether to split the output 1098 executable file into two parts: one for features that require 1099 ``setuid root``, and one for the remaining features (i.e. those that 1100 do not require ``setuid root``). 1101 1102 The ``BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID`` variable defaults to "1", which results in 1103 splitting the output executable file. Set the variable to "0" to get 1104 a single output executable file. 1105 1106 :term:`CACHE` 1107 Specifies the directory BitBake uses to store a cache of the 1108 :term:`Metadata` so it does not need to be parsed every time 1109 BitBake is started. 1110 1111 :term:`CC` 1112 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C compiler. 1113 1114 :term:`CFLAGS` 1115 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler. This variable is 1116 exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the 1117 software being built during the compilation step. 1118 1119 Default initialization for ``CFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1120 being built: 1121 1122 - :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` when building for the 1123 target 1124 1125 - :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` when building for the 1126 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1127 1128 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` when building for 1129 an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1130 1131 :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE` 1132 An internal variable specifying the special class override that 1133 should currently apply (e.g. "class-target", "class-native", and so 1134 forth). The classes that use this variable (e.g. 1135 :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>`, 1136 :ref:`nativesdk <ref-classes-nativesdk>`, and so forth) set the 1137 variable to appropriate values. 1138 1139 .. note:: 1140 1141 ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` gets its default "class-target" value from the 1142 ``bitbake.conf`` file. 1143 1144 As an example, the following override allows you to install extra 1145 files, but only when building for the target: 1146 :: 1147 1148 do_install_append_class-target() { 1149 install my-extra-file ${D}${sysconfdir} 1150 } 1151 1152 Here is an example where ``FOO`` is set to 1153 "native" when building for the build host, and to "other" when not 1154 building for the build host: 1155 :: 1156 1157 FOO_class-native = "native" 1158 FOO = "other" 1159 1160 The underlying mechanism behind ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` is simply 1161 that it is included in the default value of 1162 :term:`OVERRIDES`. 1163 1164 :term:`CLEANBROKEN` 1165 If set to "1" within a recipe, ``CLEANBROKEN`` specifies that the 1166 ``make clean`` command does not work for the software being built. 1167 Consequently, the OpenEmbedded build system will not try to run 1168 ``make clean`` during the :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` 1169 task, which is the default behavior. 1170 1171 :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES` 1172 Provides a list of hardware features that are enabled in both 1173 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` and 1174 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. This select list of 1175 features contains features that make sense to be controlled both at 1176 the machine and distribution configuration level. For example, the 1177 "bluetooth" feature requires hardware support but should also be 1178 optional at the distribution level, in case the hardware supports 1179 Bluetooth but you do not ever intend to use it. 1180 1181 :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` 1182 Points to ``meta/files/common-licenses`` in the 1183 :term:`Source Directory`, which is where generic license 1184 files reside. 1185 1186 :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` 1187 A regular expression that resolves to one or more hosts (when the 1188 recipe is native) or one or more targets (when the recipe is 1189 non-native) with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression 1190 is matched against :term:`HOST_SYS`. You can use the 1191 variable to stop recipes from being built for classes of systems with 1192 which the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is 1193 particularly useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase 1194 parsing speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not 1195 compatible with the current system. 1196 1197 :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE` 1198 A regular expression that resolves to one or more target machines 1199 with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression is matched 1200 against :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. You can use 1201 the variable to stop recipes from being built for machines with which 1202 the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is particularly 1203 useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase parsing 1204 speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not compatible 1205 with the current machine. 1206 1207 :term:`COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB` 1208 Defines wildcards to match when installing a list of complementary 1209 packages for all the packages explicitly (or implicitly) installed in 1210 an image. 1211 1212 .. note:: 1213 1214 The ``COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB`` variable uses Unix filename pattern matching 1215 (`fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__), 1216 which is similar to the Unix style pathname pattern expansion 1217 (`glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__). 1218 1219 The resulting list of complementary packages is associated with an 1220 item that can be added to 1221 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. An example usage of 1222 this is the "dev-pkgs" item that when added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` 1223 will install -dev packages (containing headers and other development 1224 files) for every package in the image. 1225 1226 To add a new feature item pointing to a wildcard, use a variable flag 1227 to specify the feature item name and use the value to specify the 1228 wildcard. Here is an example: 1229 :: 1230 1231 COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB[dev-pkgs] = '*-dev' 1232 1233 :term:`COMPONENTS_DIR` 1234 Stores sysroot components for each recipe. The OpenEmbedded build 1235 system uses ``COMPONENTS_DIR`` when constructing recipe-specific 1236 sysroots for other recipes. 1237 1238 The default is 1239 "``${``\ :term:`STAGING_DIR`\ ``}-components``." 1240 (i.e. 1241 "``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/sysroots-components``"). 1242 1243 :term:`CONF_VERSION` 1244 Tracks the version of the local configuration file (i.e. 1245 ``local.conf``). The value for ``CONF_VERSION`` increments each time 1246 ``build/conf/`` compatibility changes. 1247 1248 :term:`CONFFILES` 1249 Identifies editable or configurable files that are part of a package. 1250 If the Package Management System (PMS) is being used to update 1251 packages on the target system, it is possible that configuration 1252 files you have changed after the original installation and that you 1253 now want to remain unchanged are overwritten. In other words, 1254 editable files might exist in the package that you do not want reset 1255 as part of the package update process. You can use the ``CONFFILES`` 1256 variable to list the files in the package that you wish to prevent 1257 the PMS from overwriting during this update process. 1258 1259 To use the ``CONFFILES`` variable, provide a package name override 1260 that identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a 1261 space-separated list of files. Here is an example: 1262 :: 1263 1264 CONFFILES_${PN} += "${sysconfdir}/file1 \ 1265 ${sysconfdir}/file2 ${sysconfdir}/file3" 1266 1267 A relationship exists between the ``CONFFILES`` and ``FILES`` 1268 variables. The files listed within ``CONFFILES`` must be a subset of 1269 the files listed within ``FILES``. Because the configuration files 1270 you provide with ``CONFFILES`` are simply being identified so that 1271 the PMS will not overwrite them, it makes sense that the files must 1272 already be included as part of the package through the ``FILES`` 1273 variable. 1274 1275 .. note:: 1276 1277 When specifying paths as part of the ``CONFFILES`` variable, it is 1278 good practice to use appropriate path variables. 1279 For example, ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc`` or ``${bindir}`` 1280 rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these variables at 1281 the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in the 1282 :term:`Source Directory`. 1283 1284 :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` 1285 Identifies the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) source files. The 1286 OpenEmbedded build system receives and uses this kernel Kconfig 1287 variable as an environment variable. By default, the variable is set 1288 to null (""). 1289 1290 The ``CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`` can be either a single cpio archive 1291 with a ``.cpio`` suffix or a space-separated list of directories and 1292 files for building the initramfs image. A cpio archive should contain 1293 a filesystem archive to be used as an initramfs image. Directories 1294 should contain a filesystem layout to be included in the initramfs 1295 image. Files should contain entries according to the format described 1296 by the ``usr/gen_init_cpio`` program in the kernel tree. 1297 1298 If you specify multiple directories and files, the initramfs image 1299 will be the aggregate of all of them. 1300 1301 For information on creating an initramfs, see the 1302 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 1303 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 1304 1305 :term:`CONFIG_SITE` 1306 A list of files that contains ``autoconf`` test results relevant to 1307 the current build. This variable is used by the Autotools utilities 1308 when running ``configure``. 1309 1310 :term:`CONFIGURE_FLAGS` 1311 The minimal arguments for GNU configure. 1312 1313 :term:`CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES` 1314 When inheriting the 1315 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 1316 class, this variable identifies distribution features that would be 1317 in conflict should the recipe be built. In other words, if the 1318 ``CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that also 1319 appears in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 1320 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 1321 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 1322 1323 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1324 A space-separated list of licenses to exclude from the source 1325 archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In 1326 other words, if a license in a recipe's 1327 :term:`LICENSE` value is in the value of 1328 ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE``, then its source is not archived by the 1329 class. 1330 1331 .. note:: 1332 1333 The ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` variable takes precedence over the 1334 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` variable. 1335 1336 The default value, which is "CLOSED Proprietary", for 1337 ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` is set by the 1338 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1339 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1340 1341 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` 1342 A space-separated list of licenses to include in the source archived 1343 by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In other 1344 words, if a license in a recipe's :term:`LICENSE` 1345 value is in the value of ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE``, then its 1346 source is archived by the class. 1347 1348 The default value is set by the 1349 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1350 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. The default value includes 1351 "GPL*", "LGPL*", and "AGPL*". 1352 1353 :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE` 1354 A list of recipes to exclude in the source archived by the 1355 :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The 1356 ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and 1357 exclusion caused through the 1358 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and 1359 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1360 variables, respectively. 1361 1362 The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly exclude 1363 any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` is set by the 1364 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1365 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1366 1367 :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE` 1368 A list of recipes to include in the source archived by the 1369 :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The 1370 ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and 1371 exclusion caused through the 1372 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and 1373 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1374 variables, respectively. 1375 1376 The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly include 1377 any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` is set by the 1378 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1379 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1380 1381 :term:`COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES` 1382 A space-separated list of recipe types to include in the source 1383 archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. 1384 Recipe types are ``target``, ``native``, ``nativesdk``, ``cross``, 1385 ``crosssdk``, and ``cross-canadian``. 1386 1387 The default value, which is "target*", for ``COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES`` 1388 is set by the :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` 1389 class, which is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1390 1391 :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` 1392 If set to "1" along with the 1393 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, the 1394 OpenEmbedded build system copies into the image the license files, 1395 which are located in ``/usr/share/common-licenses``, for each 1396 package. The license files are placed in directories within the image 1397 itself during build time. 1398 1399 .. note:: 1400 1401 The ``COPY_LIC_DIRS`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for 1402 newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for 1403 read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the 1404 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information. 1405 You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 1406 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for 1407 information on providing license text. 1408 1409 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` 1410 If set to "1", the OpenEmbedded build system copies the license 1411 manifest for the image to 1412 ``/usr/share/common-licenses/license.manifest`` within the image 1413 itself during build time. 1414 1415 .. note:: 1416 1417 The ``COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for 1418 newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for 1419 read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the 1420 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information. 1421 You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 1422 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for 1423 information on providing license text. 1424 1425 :term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL` 1426 Specifies the list of packages to be added to the image. You should 1427 only set this variable in the ``local.conf`` configuration file found 1428 in the :term:`Build Directory`. 1429 1430 This variable replaces ``POKY_EXTRA_INSTALL``, which is no longer 1431 supported. 1432 1433 :term:`COREBASE` 1434 Specifies the parent directory of the OpenEmbedded-Core Metadata 1435 layer (i.e. ``meta``). 1436 1437 It is an important distinction that ``COREBASE`` points to the parent 1438 of this layer and not the layer itself. Consider an example where you 1439 have cloned the Poky Git repository and retained the ``poky`` name 1440 for your local copy of the repository. In this case, ``COREBASE`` 1441 points to the ``poky`` folder because it is the parent directory of 1442 the ``poky/meta`` layer. 1443 1444 :term:`COREBASE_FILES` 1445 Lists files from the :term:`COREBASE` directory that 1446 should be copied other than the layers listed in the 1447 ``bblayers.conf`` file. The ``COREBASE_FILES`` variable exists for 1448 the purpose of copying metadata from the OpenEmbedded build system 1449 into the extensible SDK. 1450 1451 Explicitly listing files in ``COREBASE`` is needed because it 1452 typically contains build directories and other files that should not 1453 normally be copied into the extensible SDK. Consequently, the value 1454 of ``COREBASE_FILES`` is used in order to only copy the files that 1455 are actually needed. 1456 1457 :term:`CPP` 1458 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C preprocessor. 1459 1460 :term:`CPPFLAGS` 1461 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 1462 C and the C++ compilers). This variable is exported to an environment 1463 variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the 1464 compilation step. 1465 1466 Default initialization for ``CPPFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1467 being built: 1468 1469 - :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` when building for 1470 the target 1471 1472 - :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` when building for the 1473 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1474 1475 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` when building 1476 for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1477 1478 :term:`CROSS_COMPILE` 1479 The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools. The 1480 ``CROSS_COMPILE`` variable is the same as the 1481 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` variable. 1482 1483 .. note:: 1484 1485 The OpenEmbedded build system sets the ``CROSS_COMPILE`` 1486 variable only in certain contexts (e.g. when building for kernel 1487 and kernel module recipes). 1488 1489 :term:`CVSDIR` 1490 The directory in which files checked out under the CVS system are 1491 stored. 1492 1493 :term:`CXX` 1494 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C++ compiler. 1495 1496 :term:`CXXFLAGS` 1497 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler. This variable is 1498 exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the 1499 software being built during the compilation step. 1500 1501 Default initialization for ``CXXFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1502 being built: 1503 1504 - :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` when building for 1505 the target 1506 1507 - :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` when building for the 1508 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1509 1510 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` when building 1511 for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1512 1513 :term:`D` 1514 The destination directory. The location in the :term:`Build Directory` 1515 where components are installed by the 1516 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task. This location defaults 1517 to: 1518 :: 1519 1520 ${WORKDIR}/image 1521 1522 .. note:: 1523 1524 Tasks that read from or write to this directory should run under 1525 :ref:`fakeroot <overview-manual/concepts:fakeroot and pseudo>`. 1526 1527 :term:`DATE` 1528 The date the build was started. Dates appear using the year, month, 1529 and day (YMD) format (e.g. "20150209" for February 9th, 2015). 1530 1531 :term:`DATETIME` 1532 The date and time on which the current build started. The format is 1533 suitable for timestamps. 1534 1535 :term:`DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME` 1536 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 1537 which is the default behavior, ``DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME`` specifies a 1538 particular package should not be renamed according to Debian library 1539 package naming. You must use the package name as an override when you 1540 set this variable. Here is an example from the ``fontconfig`` recipe: 1541 :: 1542 1543 DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME_fontconfig-utils = "1" 1544 1545 :term:`DEBIANNAME` 1546 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 1547 which is the default behavior, ``DEBIANNAME`` allows you to override 1548 the library name for an individual package. Overriding the library 1549 name in these cases is rare. You must use the package name as an 1550 override when you set this variable. Here is an example from the 1551 ``dbus`` recipe: 1552 :: 1553 1554 DEBIANNAME_${PN} = "dbus-1" 1555 1556 :term:`DEBUG_BUILD` 1557 Specifies to build packages with debugging information. This 1558 influences the value of the ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable. 1559 1560 :term:`DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION` 1561 The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when 1562 compiling a system for debugging. This variable defaults to "-O 1563 -fno-omit-frame-pointer ${DEBUG_FLAGS} -pipe". 1564 1565 :term:`DEFAULT_PREFERENCE` 1566 Specifies a weak bias for recipe selection priority. 1567 1568 The most common usage of this is variable is to set it to "-1" within 1569 a recipe for a development version of a piece of software. Using the 1570 variable in this way causes the stable version of the recipe to build 1571 by default in the absence of ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` being used to 1572 build the development version. 1573 1574 .. note:: 1575 1576 The bias provided by ``DEFAULT_PREFERENCE`` is weak and is overridden 1577 by :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` if that variable is different between two 1578 layers that contain different versions of the same recipe. 1579 1580 :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` 1581 The default CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) tunings (i.e. 1582 the "tune") used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The 1583 ``DEFAULTTUNE`` helps define 1584 :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. 1585 1586 The default tune is either implicitly or explicitly set by the 1587 machine (:term:`MACHINE`). However, you can override 1588 the setting using available tunes as defined with 1589 :term:`AVAILTUNES`. 1590 1591 :term:`DEPENDS` 1592 Lists a recipe's build-time dependencies. These are dependencies on 1593 other recipes whose contents (e.g. headers and shared libraries) are 1594 needed by the recipe at build time. 1595 1596 As an example, consider a recipe ``foo`` that contains the following 1597 assignment: 1598 :: 1599 1600 DEPENDS = "bar" 1601 1602 The practical effect of the previous 1603 assignment is that all files installed by bar will be available in 1604 the appropriate staging sysroot, given by the 1605 :term:`STAGING_DIR* <STAGING_DIR>` variables, by the time the 1606 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for ``foo`` runs. 1607 This mechanism is implemented by having ``do_configure`` depend on 1608 the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task of 1609 each recipe listed in ``DEPENDS``, through a 1610 ``[``\ :ref:`deptask <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ``]`` 1611 declaration in the :ref:`base <ref-classes-base>` class. 1612 1613 .. note:: 1614 1615 It seldom is necessary to reference, for example, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` 1616 explicitly. The standard classes and build-related variables are 1617 configured to automatically use the appropriate staging sysroots. 1618 1619 As another example, ``DEPENDS`` can also be used to add utilities 1620 that run on the build machine during the build. For example, a recipe 1621 that makes use of a code generator built by the recipe ``codegen`` 1622 might have the following: 1623 :: 1624 1625 DEPENDS = "codegen-native" 1626 1627 For more 1628 information, see the :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>` class and 1629 the :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` variable. 1630 1631 .. note:: 1632 1633 - ``DEPENDS`` is a list of recipe names. Or, to be more precise, 1634 it is a list of :term:`PROVIDES` names, which 1635 usually match recipe names. Putting a package name such as 1636 "foo-dev" in ``DEPENDS`` does not make sense. Use "foo" 1637 instead, as this will put files from all the packages that make 1638 up ``foo``, which includes those from ``foo-dev``, into the 1639 sysroot. 1640 1641 - One recipe having another recipe in ``DEPENDS`` does not by 1642 itself add any runtime dependencies between the packages 1643 produced by the two recipes. However, as explained in the 1644 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 1645 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, 1646 runtime dependencies will often be added automatically, meaning 1647 ``DEPENDS`` alone is sufficient for most recipes. 1648 1649 - Counterintuitively, ``DEPENDS`` is often necessary even for 1650 recipes that install precompiled components. For example, if 1651 ``libfoo`` is a precompiled library that links against 1652 ``libbar``, then linking against ``libfoo`` requires both 1653 ``libfoo`` and ``libbar`` to be available in the sysroot. 1654 Without a ``DEPENDS`` from the recipe that installs ``libfoo`` 1655 to the recipe that installs ``libbar``, other recipes might 1656 fail to link against ``libfoo``. 1657 1658 For information on runtime dependencies, see the 1659 :term:`RDEPENDS` variable. You can also see the 1660 ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and 1661 ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the 1662 BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and 1663 dependencies. 1664 1665 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR` 1666 Points to the general area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to 1667 place images, packages, SDKs, and other output files that are ready 1668 to be used outside of the build system. By default, this directory 1669 resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as 1670 ``${TMPDIR}/deploy``. 1671 1672 For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see 1673 ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section. 1674 For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the 1675 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`", 1676 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`", and 1677 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections all in the 1678 Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1679 1680 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_DEB` 1681 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1682 Debian packages that are ready to be used outside of the build 1683 system. This variable applies only when 1684 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1685 "package_deb". 1686 1687 The BitBake configuration file initially defines the 1688 ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable as a sub-folder of 1689 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1690 :: 1691 1692 DEPLOY_DIR_DEB = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/deb" 1693 1694 The :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>` class uses the 1695 ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable to make sure the 1696 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_deb` task 1697 writes Debian packages into the appropriate folder. For more 1698 information on how packaging works, see the 1699 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1700 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1701 1702 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 1703 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1704 images and other associated output files that are ready to be 1705 deployed onto the target machine. The directory is machine-specific 1706 as it contains the ``${MACHINE}`` name. By default, this directory 1707 resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as 1708 ``${DEPLOY_DIR}/images/${MACHINE}/``. 1709 1710 For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see 1711 ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section. 1712 For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the 1713 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`" and 1714 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections both in 1715 the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1716 1717 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IPK` 1718 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1719 IPK packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system. 1720 This variable applies only when 1721 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1722 "package_ipk". 1723 1724 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1725 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1726 :: 1727 1728 DEPLOY_DIR_IPK = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/ipk" 1729 1730 The :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>` class uses the 1731 ``DEPLOY_DIR_IPK`` variable to make sure the 1732 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_ipk` task 1733 writes IPK packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1734 on how packaging works, see the 1735 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1736 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1737 1738 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_RPM` 1739 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1740 RPM packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system. 1741 This variable applies only when 1742 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1743 "package_rpm". 1744 1745 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1746 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1747 :: 1748 1749 DEPLOY_DIR_RPM = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/rpm" 1750 1751 The :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>` class uses the 1752 ``DEPLOY_DIR_RPM`` variable to make sure the 1753 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_rpm` task 1754 writes RPM packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1755 on how packaging works, see the 1756 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1757 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1758 1759 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_TAR` 1760 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1761 tarballs that are ready to be used outside of the build system. This 1762 variable applies only when 1763 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1764 "package_tar". 1765 1766 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1767 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1768 :: 1769 1770 DEPLOY_DIR_TAR = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/tar" 1771 1772 The :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class uses the 1773 ``DEPLOY_DIR_TAR`` variable to make sure the 1774 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_tar` task 1775 writes TAR packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1776 on how packaging works, see the 1777 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1778 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1779 1780 :term:`DEPLOYDIR` 1781 When inheriting the :ref:`deploy <ref-classes-deploy>` class, the 1782 ``DEPLOYDIR`` points to a temporary work area for deployed files that 1783 is set in the ``deploy`` class as follows: 1784 :: 1785 1786 DEPLOYDIR = "${WORKDIR}/deploy-${PN}" 1787 1788 Recipes inheriting the ``deploy`` class should copy files to be 1789 deployed into ``DEPLOYDIR``, and the class will take care of copying 1790 them into :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 1791 afterwards. 1792 1793 :term:`DESCRIPTION` 1794 The package description used by package managers. If not set, 1795 ``DESCRIPTION`` takes the value of the :term:`SUMMARY` 1796 variable. 1797 1798 :term:`DISTRO` 1799 The short name of the distribution. For information on the long name 1800 of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` 1801 variable. 1802 1803 The ``DISTRO`` variable corresponds to a distribution configuration 1804 file whose root name is the same as the variable's argument and whose 1805 filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the distribution 1806 configuration file for the Poky distribution is named ``poky.conf`` 1807 and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory of the 1808 :term:`Source Directory`. 1809 1810 Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO`` variable is set as 1811 follows: 1812 :: 1813 1814 DISTRO = "poky" 1815 1816 Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro`` 1817 directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the 1818 distribution configuration. The value for ``DISTRO`` must not contain 1819 spaces, and is typically all lower-case. 1820 1821 .. note:: 1822 1823 If the ``DISTRO`` variable is blank, a set of default configurations 1824 are used, which are specified within 1825 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory. 1826 1827 :term:`DISTRO_CODENAME` 1828 Specifies a codename for the distribution being built. 1829 1830 :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 1831 Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images. 1832 This variable takes affect through ``packagegroup-base`` so the 1833 variable only really applies to the more full-featured images that 1834 include ``packagegroup-base``. You can use this variable to keep 1835 distro policy out of generic images. As with all other distro 1836 variables, you set this variable in the distro ``.conf`` file. 1837 1838 :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 1839 Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images if 1840 the packages exist. The packages might not exist or be empty (e.g. 1841 kernel modules). The list of packages are automatically installed but 1842 you can remove them. 1843 1844 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` 1845 The software support you want in your distribution for various 1846 features. You define your distribution features in the distribution 1847 configuration file. 1848 1849 In most cases, the presence or absence of a feature in 1850 ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` is translated to the appropriate option supplied 1851 to the configure script during the 1852 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for recipes that 1853 optionally support the feature. For example, specifying "x11" in 1854 ``DISTRO_FEATURES``, causes every piece of software built for the 1855 target that can optionally support X11 to have its X11 support 1856 enabled. 1857 1858 Two more examples are Bluetooth and NFS support. For a more complete 1859 list of features that ships with the Yocto Project and that you can 1860 provide with this variable, see the ":ref:`ref-features-distro`" section. 1861 1862 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL` 1863 Features to be added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` if not also present in 1864 ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``. 1865 1866 This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is 1867 not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference 1868 the variable to see which distro features are being backfilled for 1869 all distro configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section 1870 for more information. 1871 1872 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED` 1873 Features from ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be 1874 backfilled (i.e. added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES``) during the build. See 1875 the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information. 1876 1877 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT` 1878 A convenience variable that gives you the default list of distro 1879 features with the exception of any features specific to the C library 1880 (``libc``). 1881 1882 When creating a custom distribution, you might find it useful to be 1883 able to reuse the default 1884 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` options without the 1885 need to write out the full set. Here is an example that uses 1886 ``DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT`` from a custom distro configuration file: 1887 :: 1888 1889 DISTRO_FEATURES ?= "${DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT} myfeature" 1890 1891 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE` 1892 Specifies a list of features that if present in the target 1893 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be 1894 included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building native recipes. This 1895 variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the 1896 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE` 1897 variable. 1898 1899 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK` 1900 Specifies a list of features that if present in the target 1901 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be 1902 included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building nativesdk recipes. This 1903 variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the 1904 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK` 1905 variable. 1906 1907 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE` 1908 Specifies a list of features that should be included in 1909 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building native 1910 recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features filtered 1911 using the 1912 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE` 1913 variable. 1914 1915 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK` 1916 Specifies a list of features that should be included in 1917 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building 1918 nativesdk recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features 1919 filtered using the 1920 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK` 1921 variable. 1922 1923 :term:`DISTRO_NAME` 1924 The long name of the distribution. For information on the short name 1925 of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO` variable. 1926 1927 The ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable corresponds to a distribution 1928 configuration file whose root name is the same as the variable's 1929 argument and whose filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the 1930 distribution configuration file for the Poky distribution is named 1931 ``poky.conf`` and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory 1932 of the :term:`Source Directory`. 1933 1934 Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is set 1935 as follows: 1936 :: 1937 1938 DISTRO_NAME = "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)" 1939 1940 Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro`` 1941 directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the 1942 distribution configuration. 1943 1944 .. note:: 1945 1946 If the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is blank, a set of default 1947 configurations are used, which are specified within 1948 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory. 1949 1950 :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` 1951 The version of the distribution. 1952 1953 :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` 1954 A colon-separated list of overrides specific to the current 1955 distribution. By default, this list includes the value of 1956 :term:`DISTRO`. 1957 1958 You can extend ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that should 1959 apply to the distribution. 1960 1961 The underlying mechanism behind ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` is simply that it 1962 is included in the default value of 1963 :term:`OVERRIDES`. 1964 1965 :term:`DL_DIR` 1966 The central download directory used by the build process to store 1967 downloads. By default, ``DL_DIR`` gets files suitable for mirroring 1968 for everything except Git repositories. If you want tarballs of Git 1969 repositories, use the 1970 :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS` 1971 variable. 1972 1973 You can set this directory by defining the ``DL_DIR`` variable in the 1974 ``conf/local.conf`` file. This directory is self-maintaining and you 1975 should not have to touch it. By default, the directory is 1976 ``downloads`` in the :term:`Build Directory`. 1977 :: 1978 1979 #DL_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/downloads" 1980 1981 To specify a different download directory, 1982 simply remove the comment from the line and provide your directory. 1983 1984 During a first build, the system downloads many different source code 1985 tarballs from various upstream projects. Downloading can take a 1986 while, particularly if your network connection is slow. Tarballs are 1987 all stored in the directory defined by ``DL_DIR`` and the build 1988 system looks there first to find source tarballs. 1989 1990 .. note:: 1991 1992 When wiping and rebuilding, you can preserve this directory to 1993 speed up this part of subsequent builds. 1994 1995 You can safely share this directory between multiple builds on the 1996 same development machine. For additional information on how the build 1997 process gets source files when working behind a firewall or proxy 1998 server, see this specific question in the ":doc:`faq`" 1999 chapter. You can also refer to the 2000 ":yocto_wiki:`Working Behind a Network Proxy </Working_Behind_a_Network_Proxy>`" 2001 Wiki page. 2002 2003 :term:`DOC_COMPRESS` 2004 When inheriting the :ref:`compress_doc <ref-classes-compress_doc>` 2005 class, this variable sets the compression policy used when the 2006 OpenEmbedded build system compresses man pages and info pages. By 2007 default, the compression method used is gz (gzip). Other policies 2008 available are xz and bz2. 2009 2010 For information on policies and on how to use this variable, see the 2011 comments in the ``meta/classes/compress_doc.bbclass`` file. 2012 2013 :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` 2014 When building bootable images (i.e. where ``hddimg``, ``iso``, or 2015 ``wic.vmdk`` is in :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`), the 2016 ``EFI_PROVIDER`` variable specifies the EFI bootloader to use. The 2017 default is "grub-efi", but "systemd-boot" can be used instead. 2018 2019 See the :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` and 2020 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` classes for more 2021 information. 2022 2023 :term:`ENABLE_BINARY_LOCALE_GENERATION` 2024 Variable that controls which locales for ``glibc`` are generated 2025 during the build (useful if the target device has 64Mbytes of RAM or 2026 less). 2027 2028 :term:`ERR_REPORT_DIR` 2029 When used with the :ref:`report-error <ref-classes-report-error>` 2030 class, specifies the path used for storing the debug files created by 2031 the :ref:`error reporting 2032 tool <dev-manual/common-tasks:using the error reporting tool>`, which 2033 allows you to submit build errors you encounter to a central 2034 database. By default, the value of this variable is 2035 ``${``\ :term:`LOG_DIR`\ ``}/error-report``. 2036 2037 You can set ``ERR_REPORT_DIR`` to the path you want the error 2038 reporting tool to store the debug files as follows in your 2039 ``local.conf`` file: 2040 :: 2041 2042 ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path" 2043 2044 :term:`ERROR_QA` 2045 Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as 2046 errors by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in 2047 your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you 2048 can control with this variable, see the 2049 ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section. 2050 2051 :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS` 2052 Triggers the OpenEmbedded build system's shared libraries resolver to 2053 exclude an entire package when scanning for shared libraries. 2054 2055 .. note:: 2056 2057 The shared libraries resolver's functionality results in part from 2058 the internal function ``package_do_shlibs``, which is part of the 2059 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. You should be aware that the shared 2060 libraries resolver might implicitly define some dependencies between 2061 packages. 2062 2063 The ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable is similar to the 2064 :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` variable, which excludes a 2065 package's particular libraries only and not the whole package. 2066 2067 Use the ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable by setting it to "1" for a 2068 particular package: 2069 :: 2070 2071 EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS = "1" 2072 2073 :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD` 2074 Directs BitBake to exclude a recipe from world builds (i.e. 2075 ``bitbake world``). During world builds, BitBake locates, parses and 2076 builds all recipes found in every layer exposed in the 2077 ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file. 2078 2079 To exclude a recipe from a world build using this variable, set the 2080 variable to "1" in the recipe. 2081 2082 .. note:: 2083 2084 Recipes added to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` may still be built during a 2085 world build in order to satisfy dependencies of other recipes. Adding 2086 a recipe to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` only ensures that the recipe is not 2087 explicitly added to the list of build targets in a world build. 2088 2089 :term:`EXTENDPE` 2090 Used with file and pathnames to create a prefix for a recipe's 2091 version based on the recipe's :term:`PE` value. If ``PE`` 2092 is set and greater than zero for a recipe, ``EXTENDPE`` becomes that 2093 value (e.g if ``PE`` is equal to "1" then ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "1"). 2094 If a recipe's ``PE`` is not set (the default) or is equal to zero, 2095 ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "". 2096 2097 See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. 2098 2099 :term:`EXTENDPKGV` 2100 The full package version specification as it appears on the final 2101 packages produced by a recipe. The variable's value is normally used 2102 to fix a runtime dependency to the exact same version of another 2103 package in the same recipe: 2104 :: 2105 2106 RDEPENDS_${PN}-additional-module = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})" 2107 2108 The dependency relationships are intended to force the package 2109 manager to upgrade these types of packages in lock-step. 2110 2111 :term:`EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS` 2112 When set, the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` variable indicates that these 2113 tools are not in the source tree. 2114 2115 When kernel tools are available in the tree, they are preferred over 2116 any externally installed tools. Setting the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` 2117 variable tells the OpenEmbedded build system to prefer the installed 2118 external tools. See the 2119 :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` class in 2120 ``meta/classes`` to see how the variable is used. 2121 2122 :term:`EXTERNALSRC` 2123 When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` 2124 class, this variable points to the source tree, which is outside of 2125 the OpenEmbedded build system. When set, this variable sets the 2126 :term:`S` variable, which is what the OpenEmbedded build 2127 system uses to locate unpacked recipe source code. 2128 2129 For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the 2130 ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You 2131 can also find information on how to use this variable in the 2132 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`" 2133 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2134 2135 :term:`EXTERNALSRC_BUILD` 2136 When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` 2137 class, this variable points to the directory in which the recipe's 2138 source code is built, which is outside of the OpenEmbedded build 2139 system. When set, this variable sets the :term:`B` variable, 2140 which is what the OpenEmbedded build system uses to locate the Build 2141 Directory. 2142 2143 For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the 2144 ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You 2145 can also find information on how to use this variable in the 2146 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`" 2147 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2148 2149 :term:`EXTRA_AUTORECONF` 2150 For recipes inheriting the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` 2151 class, you can use ``EXTRA_AUTORECONF`` to specify extra options to 2152 pass to the ``autoreconf`` command that is executed during the 2153 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. 2154 2155 The default value is "--exclude=autopoint". 2156 2157 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` 2158 A list of additional features to include in an image. When listing 2159 more than one feature, separate them with a space. 2160 2161 Typically, you configure this variable in your ``local.conf`` file, 2162 which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`. 2163 Although you can use this variable from within a recipe, best 2164 practices dictate that you do not. 2165 2166 .. note:: 2167 2168 To enable primary features from within the image recipe, use the 2169 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variable. 2170 2171 Here are some examples of features you can add: 2172 2173 - "dbg-pkgs" - Adds -dbg packages for all installed packages including 2174 symbol information for debugging and profiling. 2175 2176 - "debug-tweaks" - Makes an image suitable for debugging. For example, allows root logins without passwords and 2177 enables post-installation logging. See the 'allow-empty-password' and 2178 'post-install-logging' features in the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" 2179 section for more information. 2180 - "dev-pkgs" - Adds -dev packages for all installed packages. This is 2181 useful if you want to develop against the libraries in the image. 2182 - "read-only-rootfs" - Creates an image whose root filesystem is 2183 read-only. See the 2184 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating a read-only root filesystem`" 2185 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more 2186 information 2187 - "tools-debug" - Adds debugging tools such as gdb and strace. 2188 - "tools-sdk" - Adds development tools such as gcc, make, 2189 pkgconfig and so forth. 2190 - "tools-testapps" - Adds useful testing tools 2191 such as ts_print, aplay, arecord and so forth. 2192 2193 For a complete list of image features that ships with the Yocto 2194 Project, see the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section. 2195 2196 For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this 2197 variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``" 2198 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2199 2200 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGECMD` 2201 Specifies additional options for the image creation command that has 2202 been specified in :term:`IMAGE_CMD`. When setting 2203 this variable, use an override for the associated image type. Here is 2204 an example: 2205 :: 2206 2207 EXTRA_IMAGECMD_ext3 ?= "-i 4096" 2208 2209 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS` 2210 A list of recipes to build that do not provide packages for 2211 installing into the root filesystem. 2212 2213 Sometimes a recipe is required to build the final image but is not 2214 needed in the root filesystem. You can use the ``EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS`` 2215 variable to list these recipes and thus specify the dependencies. A 2216 typical example is a required bootloader in a machine configuration. 2217 2218 .. note:: 2219 2220 To add packages to the root filesystem, see the various 2221 \*:term:`RDEPENDS` and \*:term:`RRECOMMENDS` variables. 2222 2223 :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` 2224 A list of subdirectories of 2225 ``${``\ :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE`\ ``}`` 2226 added to the beginning of the environment variable ``PATH``. As an 2227 example, the following prepends 2228 "${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/foo:${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/bar:" to 2229 ``PATH``: 2230 :: 2231 2232 EXTRANATIVEPATH = "foo bar" 2233 2234 :term:`EXTRA_OECMAKE` 2235 Additional `CMake <https://cmake.org/overview/>`__ options. See the 2236 :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` class for additional information. 2237 2238 :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` 2239 Additional ``configure`` script options. See 2240 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` for 2241 additional information on passing configure script options. 2242 2243 :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE` 2244 Additional GNU ``make`` options. 2245 2246 Because the ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` defaults to "", you need to set the 2247 variable to specify any required GNU options. 2248 2249 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` and 2250 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` also make use of 2251 ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` to pass the required flags. 2252 2253 :term:`EXTRA_OESCONS` 2254 When inheriting the :ref:`scons <ref-classes-scons>` class, this 2255 variable specifies additional configuration options you want to pass 2256 to the ``scons`` command line. 2257 2258 :term:`EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS` 2259 When inheriting the :ref:`extrausers <ref-classes-extrausers>` 2260 class, this variable provides image level user and group operations. 2261 This is a more global method of providing user and group 2262 configuration as compared to using the 2263 :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, which ties user and 2264 group configurations to a specific recipe. 2265 2266 The set list of commands you can configure using the 2267 ``EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS`` is shown in the ``extrausers`` class. These 2268 commands map to the normal Unix commands of the same names: 2269 :: 2270 2271 # EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\ 2272 # useradd -p '' tester; \ 2273 # groupadd developers; \ 2274 # userdel nobody; \ 2275 # groupdel -g video; \ 2276 # groupmod -g 1020 developers; \ 2277 # usermod -s /bin/sh tester; \ 2278 # " 2279 2280 :term:`FEATURE_PACKAGES` 2281 Defines one or more packages to include in an image when a specific 2282 item is included in :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. 2283 When setting the value, ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` should have the name of 2284 the feature item as an override. Here is an example: 2285 :: 2286 2287 FEATURE_PACKAGES_widget = "package1 package2" 2288 2289 In this example, if "widget" were added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``, 2290 package1 and package2 would be included in the image. 2291 2292 .. note:: 2293 2294 Packages installed by features defined through ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` 2295 are often package groups. While similarly named, you should not 2296 confuse the ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` variable with package groups, which 2297 are discussed elsewhere in the documentation. 2298 2299 :term:`FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI` 2300 Points to the base URL of the server and location within the 2301 document-root that provides the metadata and packages required by 2302 OPKG to support runtime package management of IPK packages. You set 2303 this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 2304 2305 Consider the following example: 2306 :: 2307 2308 FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI = "http://192.168.7.1/BOARD-dir" 2309 2310 This example assumes you are serving 2311 your packages over HTTP and your databases are located in a directory 2312 named ``BOARD-dir``, which is underneath your HTTP server's 2313 document-root. In this case, the OpenEmbedded build system generates 2314 a set of configuration files for you in your target that work with 2315 the feed. 2316 2317 :term:`FILES` 2318 The list of files and directories that are placed in a package. The 2319 :term:`PACKAGES` variable lists the packages 2320 generated by a recipe. 2321 2322 To use the ``FILES`` variable, provide a package name override that 2323 identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a space-separated 2324 list of files or paths that identify the files you want included as 2325 part of the resulting package. Here is an example: 2326 :: 2327 2328 FILES_${PN} += "${bindir}/mydir1 ${bindir}/mydir2/myfile" 2329 2330 .. note:: 2331 2332 - When specifying files or paths, you can pattern match using 2333 Python's 2334 `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ 2335 syntax. For details on the syntax, see the documentation by 2336 following the previous link. 2337 2338 - When specifying paths as part of the ``FILES`` variable, it is 2339 good practice to use appropriate path variables. For example, 2340 use ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc``, or ``${bindir}`` 2341 rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these 2342 variables at the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in 2343 the :term:`Source Directory`. You will also 2344 find the default values of the various ``FILES_*`` variables in 2345 this file. 2346 2347 If some of the files you provide with the ``FILES`` variable are 2348 editable and you know they should not be overwritten during the 2349 package update process by the Package Management System (PMS), you 2350 can identify these files so that the PMS will not overwrite them. See 2351 the :term:`CONFFILES` variable for information on 2352 how to identify these files to the PMS. 2353 2354 :term:`FILES_SOLIBSDEV` 2355 Defines the file specification to match 2356 :term:`SOLIBSDEV`. In other words, 2357 ``FILES_SOLIBSDEV`` defines the full path name of the development 2358 symbolic link (symlink) for shared libraries on the target platform. 2359 2360 The following statement from the ``bitbake.conf`` shows how it is 2361 set: 2362 :: 2363 2364 FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}" 2365 2366 :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` 2367 Extends the search path the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 2368 looking for files and patches as it processes recipes and append 2369 files. The default directories BitBake uses when it processes recipes 2370 are initially defined by the :term:`FILESPATH` 2371 variable. You can extend ``FILESPATH`` variable by using 2372 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``. 2373 2374 Best practices dictate that you accomplish this by using 2375 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` from within a ``.bbappend`` file and that you 2376 prepend paths as follows: 2377 :: 2378 2379 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:" 2380 2381 In the above example, the build system first 2382 looks for files in a directory that has the same name as the 2383 corresponding append file. 2384 2385 .. note:: 2386 2387 When extending ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``, be sure to use the immediate 2388 expansion (``:=``) operator. Immediate expansion makes sure that 2389 BitBake evaluates :term:`THISDIR` at the time the 2390 directive is encountered rather than at some later time when 2391 expansion might result in a directory that does not contain the 2392 files you need. 2393 2394 Also, include the trailing separating colon character if you are 2395 prepending. The trailing colon character is necessary because you 2396 are directing BitBake to extend the path by prepending directories 2397 to the search path. 2398 2399 Here is another common use: 2400 :: 2401 2402 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/files:" 2403 2404 In this example, the build system extends the 2405 ``FILESPATH`` variable to include a directory named ``files`` that is 2406 in the same directory as the corresponding append file. 2407 2408 This next example specifically adds three paths: 2409 :: 2410 2411 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "path_1:path_2:path_3:" 2412 2413 A final example shows how you can extend the search path and include 2414 a :term:`MACHINE`-specific override, which is useful 2415 in a BSP layer: 2416 :: 2417 2418 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend_intel-x86-common := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:" 2419 2420 The previous statement appears in the 2421 ``linux-yocto-dev.bbappend`` file, which is found in the 2422 :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories` in 2423 ``meta-intel/common/recipes-kernel/linux``. Here, the machine 2424 override is a special :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` 2425 definition for multiple ``meta-intel`` machines. 2426 2427 .. note:: 2428 2429 For a layer that supports a single BSP, the override could just be 2430 the value of ``MACHINE``. 2431 2432 By prepending paths in ``.bbappend`` files, you allow multiple append 2433 files that reside in different layers but are used for the same 2434 recipe to correctly extend the path. 2435 2436 :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` 2437 A subset of :term:`OVERRIDES` used by the 2438 OpenEmbedded build system for creating 2439 :term:`FILESPATH`. The ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable 2440 uses overrides to automatically extend the 2441 :term:`FILESPATH` variable. For an example of how 2442 that works, see the :term:`FILESPATH` variable 2443 description. Additionally, you find more information on how overrides 2444 are handled in the 2445 ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`" 2446 section of the BitBake User Manual. 2447 2448 By default, the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable is defined as: 2449 :: 2450 2451 FILESOVERRIDES = "${TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH}:${MACHINEOVERRIDES}:${DISTROOVERRIDES}" 2452 2453 .. note:: 2454 2455 Do not hand-edit the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable. The values match up 2456 with expected overrides and are used in an expected manner by the 2457 build system. 2458 2459 :term:`FILESPATH` 2460 The default set of directories the OpenEmbedded build system uses 2461 when searching for patches and files. 2462 2463 During the build process, BitBake searches each directory in 2464 ``FILESPATH`` in the specified order when looking for files and 2465 patches specified by each ``file://`` URI in a recipe's 2466 :term:`SRC_URI` statements. 2467 2468 The default value for the ``FILESPATH`` variable is defined in the 2469 ``base.bbclass`` class found in ``meta/classes`` in the 2470 :term:`Source Directory`: 2471 :: 2472 2473 FILESPATH = "${@base_set_filespath(["${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BP}", \ 2474 "${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BPN}", "${FILE_DIRNAME}/files"], d)}" 2475 2476 The 2477 ``FILESPATH`` variable is automatically extended using the overrides 2478 from the :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` variable. 2479 2480 .. note:: 2481 2482 - Do not hand-edit the ``FILESPATH`` variable. If you want the 2483 build system to look in directories other than the defaults, 2484 extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the 2485 :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` variable. 2486 2487 - Be aware that the default ``FILESPATH`` directories do not map 2488 to directories in custom layers where append files 2489 (``.bbappend``) are used. If you want the build system to find 2490 patches or files that reside with your append files, you need 2491 to extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the 2492 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` variable. 2493 2494 You can take advantage of this searching behavior in useful ways. For 2495 example, consider a case where the following directory structure 2496 exists for general and machine-specific configurations: 2497 :: 2498 2499 files/defconfig 2500 files/MACHINEA/defconfig 2501 files/MACHINEB/defconfig 2502 2503 Also in the example, the ``SRC_URI`` statement contains 2504 "file://defconfig". Given this scenario, you can set 2505 :term:`MACHINE` to "MACHINEA" and cause the build 2506 system to use files from ``files/MACHINEA``. Set ``MACHINE`` to 2507 "MACHINEB" and the build system uses files from ``files/MACHINEB``. 2508 Finally, for any machine other than "MACHINEA" and "MACHINEB", the 2509 build system uses files from ``files/defconfig``. 2510 2511 You can find out more about the patching process in the 2512 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:patching`" section 2513 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the 2514 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:patching code`" section in 2515 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. See the 2516 :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task as well. 2517 2518 :term:`FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES` 2519 Allows you to define your own file permissions settings table as part 2520 of your configuration for the packaging process. For example, suppose 2521 you need a consistent set of custom permissions for a set of groups 2522 and users across an entire work project. It is best to do this in the 2523 packages themselves but this is not always possible. 2524 2525 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``fs-perms.txt``, 2526 which is located in the ``meta/files`` folder in the :term:`Source Directory`. 2527 If you create your own file 2528 permissions setting table, you should place it in your layer or the 2529 distro's layer. 2530 2531 You define the ``FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES`` variable in the 2532 ``conf/local.conf`` file, which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`, 2533 to point to your custom 2534 ``fs-perms.txt``. You can specify more than a single file permissions 2535 setting table. The paths you specify to these files must be defined 2536 within the :term:`BBPATH` variable. 2537 2538 For guidance on how to create your own file permissions settings 2539 table file, examine the existing ``fs-perms.txt``. 2540 2541 :term:`FIT_GENERATE_KEYS` 2542 Decides whether to generate the keys for signing fitImage if they 2543 don't already exist. The keys are created in ``UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR``. 2544 The default value is 0. 2545 2546 :term:`FIT_HASH_ALG` 2547 Specifies the hash algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. For e.g. sha256. 2548 2549 :term:`FIT_KEY_GENRSA_ARGS` 2550 Arguments to openssl genrsa for generating RSA private key for signing 2551 fitImage. The default value is "-F4". i.e. the public exponent 65537 to 2552 use. 2553 2554 :term:`FIT_KEY_REQ_ARGS` 2555 Arguments to openssl req for generating certificate for signing fitImage. 2556 The default value is "-batch -new". batch for non interactive mode 2557 and new for generating new keys. 2558 2559 :term:`FIT_KEY_SIGN_PKCS` 2560 Format for public key ceritifcate used in signing fitImage. 2561 The default value is "x509". 2562 2563 :term:`FIT_SIGN_ALG` 2564 Specifies the signature algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. 2565 For e.g. rsa2048. 2566 2567 :term:`FIT_SIGN_NUMBITS` 2568 Size of private key in number of bits used in fitImage. The default 2569 value is "2048". 2570 2571 :term:`FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 2572 When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class, 2573 this variable specifies the runtime dependencies for font packages. 2574 By default, the ``FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` is set to "fontconfig-utils". 2575 2576 :term:`FONT_PACKAGES` 2577 When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class, 2578 this variable identifies packages containing font files that need to 2579 be cached by Fontconfig. By default, the ``fontcache`` class assumes 2580 that fonts are in the recipe's main package (i.e. 2581 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if fonts you 2582 need are in a package other than that main package. 2583 2584 :term:`FORCE_RO_REMOVE` 2585 Forces the removal of the packages listed in ``ROOTFS_RO_UNNEEDED`` 2586 during the generation of the root filesystem. 2587 2588 Set the variable to "1" to force the removal of these packages. 2589 2590 :term:`FULL_OPTIMIZATION` 2591 The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when 2592 compiling an optimized system. This variable defaults to "-O2 -pipe 2593 ${DEBUG_FLAGS}". 2594 2595 :term:`GCCPIE` 2596 Enables Position Independent Executables (PIE) within the GNU C 2597 Compiler (GCC). Enabling PIE in the GCC makes Return Oriented 2598 Programming (ROP) attacks much more difficult to execute. 2599 2600 By default the ``security_flags.inc`` file enables PIE by setting the 2601 variable as follows: 2602 :: 2603 2604 GCCPIE ?= "--enable-default-pie" 2605 2606 :term:`GCCVERSION` 2607 Specifies the default version of the GNU C Compiler (GCC) used for 2608 compilation. By default, ``GCCVERSION`` is set to "8.x" in the 2609 ``meta/conf/distro/include/tcmode-default.inc`` include file: 2610 :: 2611 2612 GCCVERSION ?= "8.%" 2613 2614 You can override this value by setting it in a 2615 configuration file such as the ``local.conf``. 2616 2617 :term:`GDB` 2618 The minimal command and arguments to run the GNU Debugger. 2619 2620 :term:`GITDIR` 2621 The directory in which a local copy of a Git repository is stored 2622 when it is cloned. 2623 2624 :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES` 2625 Specifies the list of GLIBC locales to generate should you not wish 2626 to generate all LIBC locals, which can be time consuming. 2627 2628 .. note:: 2629 2630 If you specifically remove the locale ``en_US.UTF-8``, you must set 2631 :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` appropriately. 2632 2633 You can set ``GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`` in your ``local.conf`` file. 2634 By default, all locales are generated. 2635 :: 2636 2637 GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES = "en_GB.UTF-8 en_US.UTF-8" 2638 2639 :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM` 2640 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 2641 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be 2642 passed to the ``groupadd`` command if you wish to add a group to the 2643 system when the package is installed. 2644 2645 Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe: 2646 :: 2647 2648 GROUPADD_PARAM_${PN} = "-r netdev" 2649 2650 For information on the standard Linux shell command 2651 ``groupadd``, see http://linux.die.net/man/8/groupadd. 2652 2653 :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` 2654 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 2655 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be 2656 passed to the ``groupmems`` command if you wish to modify the members 2657 of a group when the package is installed. 2658 2659 For information on the standard Linux shell command ``groupmems``, 2660 see http://linux.die.net/man/8/groupmems. 2661 2662 :term:`GRUB_GFXSERIAL` 2663 Configures the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) to have graphics 2664 and serial in the boot menu. Set this variable to "1" in your 2665 ``local.conf`` or distribution configuration file to enable graphics 2666 and serial in the menu. 2667 2668 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 2669 information on how this variable is used. 2670 2671 :term:`GRUB_OPTS` 2672 Additional options to add to the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) 2673 configuration. Use a semi-colon character (``;``) to separate 2674 multiple options. 2675 2676 The ``GRUB_OPTS`` variable is optional. See the 2677 :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information 2678 on how this variable is used. 2679 2680 :term:`GRUB_TIMEOUT` 2681 Specifies the timeout before executing the default ``LABEL`` in the 2682 GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB). 2683 2684 The ``GRUB_TIMEOUT`` variable is optional. See the 2685 :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information 2686 on how this variable is used. 2687 2688 :term:`GTKIMMODULES_PACKAGES` 2689 When inheriting the 2690 :ref:`gtk-immodules-cache <ref-classes-gtk-immodules-cache>` class, 2691 this variable specifies the packages that contain the GTK+ input 2692 method modules being installed when the modules are in packages other 2693 than the main package. 2694 2695 :term:`HOMEPAGE` 2696 Website where more information about the software the recipe is 2697 building can be found. 2698 2699 :term:`HOST_ARCH` 2700 The name of the target architecture, which is normally the same as 2701 :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. The OpenEmbedded build system 2702 supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures 2703 supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is 2704 configurable: 2705 2706 - arm 2707 - i586 2708 - x86_64 2709 - powerpc 2710 - powerpc64 2711 - mips 2712 - mipsel 2713 2714 :term:`HOST_CC_ARCH` 2715 Specifies architecture-specific compiler flags that are passed to the 2716 C compiler. 2717 2718 Default initialization for ``HOST_CC_ARCH`` varies depending on what 2719 is being built: 2720 2721 - :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` when building for the 2722 target 2723 2724 - :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` when building for the build host (i.e. 2725 ``-native``) 2726 2727 - ``BUILDSDK_CC_ARCH`` when building for an SDK (i.e. 2728 ``nativesdk-``) 2729 2730 :term:`HOST_OS` 2731 Specifies the name of the target operating system, which is normally 2732 the same as the :term:`TARGET_OS`. The variable can 2733 be set to "linux" for ``glibc``-based systems and to "linux-musl" for 2734 ``musl``. For ARM/EABI targets, there are also "linux-gnueabi" and 2735 "linux-musleabi" values possible. 2736 2737 :term:`HOST_PREFIX` 2738 Specifies the prefix for the cross-compile toolchain. ``HOST_PREFIX`` 2739 is normally the same as :term:`TARGET_PREFIX`. 2740 2741 :term:`HOST_SYS` 2742 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 2743 system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the 2744 current recipe. 2745 2746 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 2747 on :term:`HOST_ARCH`, 2748 :term:`HOST_VENDOR`, and 2749 :term:`HOST_OS` variables. 2750 2751 .. note:: 2752 2753 You do not need to set the variable yourself. 2754 2755 Consider these two examples: 2756 2757 - Given a native recipe on a 32-bit x86 machine running Linux, the 2758 value is "i686-linux". 2759 2760 - Given a recipe being built for a little-endian MIPS target running 2761 Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux". 2762 2763 :term:`HOSTTOOLS` 2764 A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that 2765 should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this 2766 filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. If a tool 2767 specified in the value of ``HOSTTOOLS`` is not found on the build 2768 host, the OpenEmbedded build system produces an error and the build 2769 is not started. 2770 2771 For additional information, see 2772 :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`. 2773 2774 :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL` 2775 A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that 2776 should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this 2777 filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. Unlike 2778 :term:`HOSTTOOLS`, the OpenEmbedded build system 2779 does not produce an error if a tool specified in the value of 2780 ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` is not found on the build host. Thus, you can 2781 use ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` to filter optional host tools. 2782 2783 :term:`HOST_VENDOR` 2784 Specifies the name of the vendor. ``HOST_VENDOR`` is normally the 2785 same as :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`. 2786 2787 :term:`ICECC_DISABLED` 2788 Disables or enables the ``icecc`` (Icecream) function. For more 2789 information on this function and best practices for using this 2790 variable, see the ":ref:`icecc.bbclass <ref-classes-icecc>`" 2791 section. 2792 2793 Setting this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` disables the 2794 function: 2795 :: 2796 2797 ICECC_DISABLED ??= "1" 2798 2799 To enable the function, set the variable as follows: 2800 :: 2801 2802 ICECC_DISABLED = "" 2803 2804 :term:`ICECC_ENV_EXEC` 2805 Points to the ``icecc-create-env`` script that you provide. This 2806 variable is used by the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You 2807 set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 2808 2809 If you do not point to a script that you provide, the OpenEmbedded 2810 build system uses the default script provided by the 2811 ``icecc-create-env.bb`` recipe, which is a modified version and not 2812 the one that comes with ``icecc``. 2813 2814 :term:`ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE` 2815 Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the 2816 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task that specify parallel 2817 compilation. This variable usually takes the form of "-j x", where x 2818 represents the maximum number of parallel threads ``make`` can run. 2819 2820 .. note:: 2821 2822 The options passed affect builds on all enabled machines on the 2823 network, which are machines running the ``iceccd`` daemon. 2824 2825 If your enabled machines support multiple cores, coming up with the 2826 maximum number of parallel threads that gives you the best 2827 performance could take some experimentation since machine speed, 2828 network lag, available memory, and existing machine loads can all 2829 affect build time. Consequently, unlike the 2830 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable, there is no 2831 rule-of-thumb for setting ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE`` to achieve optimal 2832 performance. 2833 2834 If you do not set ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE``, the build system does not 2835 use it (i.e. the system does not detect and assign the number of 2836 cores as is done with ``PARALLEL_MAKE``). 2837 2838 :term:`ICECC_PATH` 2839 The location of the ``icecc`` binary. You can set this variable in 2840 your ``local.conf`` file. If your ``local.conf`` file does not define 2841 this variable, the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class attempts 2842 to define it by locating ``icecc`` using ``which``. 2843 2844 :term:`ICECC_USER_CLASS_BL` 2845 Identifies user classes that you do not want the Icecream distributed 2846 compile support to consider. This variable is used by the 2847 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2848 your ``local.conf`` file. 2849 2850 When you list classes using this variable, you are "blacklisting" 2851 them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any classes 2852 you list will be distributed and compiled locally. 2853 2854 :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_BL` 2855 Identifies user recipes that you do not want the Icecream distributed 2856 compile support to consider. This variable is used by the 2857 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2858 your ``local.conf`` file. 2859 2860 When you list packages using this variable, you are "blacklisting" 2861 them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any packages 2862 you list will be distributed and compiled locally. 2863 2864 :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_WL` 2865 Identifies user recipes that use an empty 2866 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable that you want to 2867 force remote distributed compilation on using the Icecream 2868 distributed compile support. This variable is used by the 2869 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2870 your ``local.conf`` file. 2871 2872 :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` 2873 The base name of image output files. This variable defaults to the 2874 recipe name (``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). 2875 2876 :term:`IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES` 2877 A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition 2878 when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the 2879 ``bootimg-efi`` source plugin. By default, 2880 the files are 2881 installed under the same name as the source files. To change the 2882 installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon 2883 (;). Source files need to be located in 2884 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two 2885 examples: 2886 :: 2887 2888 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE};bz2" 2889 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE} microcode.cpio" 2890 2891 Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In 2892 this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base 2893 name of the source file path. To install files into a directory 2894 within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). 2895 Here are two examples: 2896 :: 2897 2898 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*" 2899 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*;boot/" 2900 2901 The first example 2902 installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/boot/loader/`` 2903 into the root of the target partition. The second example installs 2904 the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition. 2905 2906 You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the 2907 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 2908 section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference 2909 material for Wic is located in the 2910 ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter. 2911 2912 :term:`IMAGE_BOOT_FILES` 2913 A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition 2914 when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the 2915 ``bootimg-partition`` source plugin. By default, 2916 the files are 2917 installed under the same name as the source files. To change the 2918 installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon 2919 (;). Source files need to be located in 2920 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two 2921 examples: 2922 :: 2923 2924 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.img uImage;kernel" 2925 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.${UBOOT_SUFFIX} ${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}" 2926 2927 Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In 2928 this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base 2929 name of the source file path. To install files into a directory 2930 within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). 2931 Here are two examples: 2932 :: 2933 2934 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*" 2935 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*;boot/" 2936 2937 The first example 2938 installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/bcm2835-bootfiles`` 2939 into the root of the target partition. The second example installs 2940 the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition. 2941 2942 You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the 2943 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 2944 section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference 2945 material for Wic is located in the 2946 ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter. 2947 2948 :term:`IMAGE_CLASSES` 2949 A list of classes that all images should inherit. You typically use 2950 this variable to specify the list of classes that register the 2951 different types of images the OpenEmbedded build system creates. 2952 2953 The default value for ``IMAGE_CLASSES`` is ``image_types``. You can 2954 set this variable in your ``local.conf`` or in a distribution 2955 configuration file. 2956 2957 For more information, see ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass`` in the 2958 :term:`Source Directory`. 2959 2960 :term:`IMAGE_CMD` 2961 Specifies the command to create the image file for a specific image 2962 type, which corresponds to the value set set in 2963 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`, (e.g. ``ext3``, 2964 ``btrfs``, and so forth). When setting this variable, you should use 2965 an override for the associated type. Here is an example: 2966 :: 2967 2968 IMAGE_CMD_jffs2 = "mkfs.jffs2 --root=${IMAGE_ROOTFS} \ 2969 --faketime --output=${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.jffs2 \ 2970 ${EXTRA_IMAGECMD}" 2971 2972 You typically do not need to set this variable unless you are adding 2973 support for a new image type. For more examples on how to set this 2974 variable, see the :ref:`image_types <ref-classes-image_types>` 2975 class file, which is ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass``. 2976 2977 :term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES` 2978 Specifies one or more files that contain custom device tables that 2979 are passed to the ``makedevs`` command as part of creating an image. 2980 These files list basic device nodes that should be created under 2981 ``/dev`` within the image. If ``IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`` is not set, 2982 ``files/device_table-minimal.txt`` is used, which is located by 2983 :term:`BBPATH`. For details on how you should write 2984 device table files, see ``meta/files/device_table-minimal.txt`` as an 2985 example. 2986 2987 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` 2988 The primary list of features to include in an image. Typically, you 2989 configure this variable in an image recipe. Although you can use this 2990 variable from your ``local.conf`` file, which is found in the 2991 :term:`Build Directory`, best practices dictate that you do 2992 not. 2993 2994 .. note:: 2995 2996 To enable extra features from outside the image recipe, use the 2997 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variable. 2998 2999 For a list of image features that ships with the Yocto Project, see 3000 the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section. 3001 3002 For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this 3003 variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``" 3004 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3005 3006 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` 3007 Specifies the formats the OpenEmbedded build system uses during the 3008 build when creating the root filesystem. For example, setting 3009 ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` as follows causes the build system to create root 3010 filesystems using two formats: ``.ext3`` and ``.tar.bz2``: 3011 :: 3012 3013 IMAGE_FSTYPES = "ext3 tar.bz2" 3014 3015 For the complete list of supported image formats from which you can 3016 choose, see :term:`IMAGE_TYPES`. 3017 3018 .. note:: 3019 3020 - If an image recipe uses the "inherit image" line and you are 3021 setting ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` inside the recipe, you must set 3022 ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` prior to using the "inherit image" line. 3023 3024 - Due to the way the OpenEmbedded build system processes this 3025 variable, you cannot update its contents by using ``_append`` 3026 or ``_prepend``. You must use the ``+=`` operator to add one or 3027 more options to the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` variable. 3028 3029 :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` 3030 Used by recipes to specify the packages to install into an image 3031 through the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class. Use the 3032 ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable with care to avoid ordering issues. 3033 3034 Image recipes set ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to specify the packages to 3035 install into an image through ``image.bbclass``. Additionally, 3036 "helper" classes such as the 3037 :ref:`core-image <ref-classes-core-image>` class exist that can 3038 take lists used with ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` and turn them into 3039 auto-generated entries in ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` in addition to its 3040 default contents. 3041 3042 When you use this variable, it is best to use it as follows: 3043 :: 3044 3045 IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " package-name" 3046 3047 Be sure to include the space 3048 between the quotation character and the start of the package name or 3049 names. 3050 3051 .. note:: 3052 3053 - When working with a 3054 :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>` 3055 image, do not use the ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable to specify 3056 packages for installation. Instead, use the 3057 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` variable, which 3058 allows the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) recipe to use a 3059 fixed set of packages and not be affected by ``IMAGE_INSTALL``. 3060 For information on creating an initramfs, see the 3061 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" 3062 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3063 3064 - Using ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` with the 3065 :ref:`+= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:appending (+=) and prepending (=+) with spaces>` 3066 BitBake operator within the ``/conf/local.conf`` file or from 3067 within an image recipe is not recommended. Use of this operator 3068 in these ways can cause ordering issues. Since 3069 ``core-image.bbclass`` sets ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to a default 3070 value using the 3071 :ref:`?= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:setting a default value (?=)>` 3072 operator, using a ``+=`` operation against ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` 3073 results in unexpected behavior when used within 3074 ``conf/local.conf``. Furthermore, the same operation from 3075 within an image recipe may or may not succeed depending on the 3076 specific situation. In both these cases, the behavior is 3077 contrary to how most users expect the ``+=`` operator to work. 3078 3079 :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` 3080 Specifies the list of locales to install into the image during the 3081 root filesystem construction process. The OpenEmbedded build system 3082 automatically splits locale files, which are used for localization, 3083 into separate packages. Setting the ``IMAGE_LINGUAS`` variable 3084 ensures that any locale packages that correspond to packages already 3085 selected for installation into the image are also installed. Here is 3086 an example: 3087 :: 3088 3089 IMAGE_LINGUAS = "pt-br de-de" 3090 3091 In this example, the build system ensures any Brazilian Portuguese 3092 and German locale files that correspond to packages in the image are 3093 installed (i.e. ``*-locale-pt-br`` and ``*-locale-de-de`` as well as 3094 ``*-locale-pt`` and ``*-locale-de``, since some software packages 3095 only provide locale files by language and not by country-specific 3096 language). 3097 3098 See the :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES` 3099 variable for information on generating GLIBC locales. 3100 3101 3102 :term:`IMAGE_LINK_NAME` 3103 The name of the output image symlink (which does not include 3104 the version part as :term:`IMAGE_NAME` does). The default value 3105 is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` and :term:`MACHINE` 3106 variables: 3107 :: 3108 3109 IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}" 3110 3111 3112 :term:`IMAGE_MANIFEST` 3113 The manifest file for the image. This file lists all the installed 3114 packages that make up the image. The file contains package 3115 information on a line-per-package basis as follows: 3116 :: 3117 3118 packagename packagearch version 3119 3120 The :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class defines the manifest 3121 file as follows: 3122 :: 3123 3124 IMAGE_MANIFEST ="${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.manifest" 3125 3126 The location is 3127 derived using the :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 3128 and :term:`IMAGE_NAME` variables. You can find 3129 information on how the image is created in the ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:image generation`" 3130 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 3131 3132 :term:`IMAGE_NAME` 3133 The name of the output image files minus the extension. This variable 3134 is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, 3135 :term:`MACHINE`, and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` 3136 variables: 3137 :: 3138 3139 IMAGE_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3140 3141 :term:`IMAGE_NAME_SUFFIX` 3142 Suffix used for the image output file name - defaults to ``".rootfs"`` 3143 to distinguish the image file from other files created during image 3144 building; however if this suffix is redundant or not desired you can 3145 clear the value of this variable (set the value to ""). For example, 3146 this is typically cleared in initramfs image recipes. 3147 3148 :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR` 3149 Defines a multiplier that the build system applies to the initial 3150 image size for cases when the multiplier times the returned disk 3151 usage value for the image is greater than the sum of 3152 ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` and ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE``. The result of 3153 the multiplier applied to the initial image size creates free disk 3154 space in the image as overhead. By default, the build process uses a 3155 multiplier of 1.3 for this variable. This default value results in 3156 30% free disk space added to the image when this method is used to 3157 determine the final generated image size. You should be aware that 3158 post install scripts and the package management system uses disk 3159 space inside this overhead area. Consequently, the multiplier does 3160 not produce an image with all the theoretical free disk space. See 3161 ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` for information on how the build system 3162 determines the overall image size. 3163 3164 The default 30% free disk space typically gives the image enough room 3165 to boot and allows for basic post installs while still leaving a 3166 small amount of free disk space. If 30% free space is inadequate, you 3167 can increase the default value. For example, the following setting 3168 gives you 50% free space added to the image: 3169 :: 3170 3171 IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR = "1.5" 3172 3173 Alternatively, you can ensure a specific amount of free disk space is 3174 added to the image by using the ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE`` 3175 variable. 3176 3177 :term:`IMAGE_PKGTYPE` 3178 Defines the package type (i.e. DEB, RPM, IPK, or TAR) used by the 3179 OpenEmbedded build system. The variable is defined appropriately by 3180 the :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>`, 3181 :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>`, 3182 :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>`, or 3183 :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class. 3184 3185 .. note:: 3186 3187 The ``package_tar`` class is broken and is not supported. It is 3188 recommended that you do not use it. 3189 3190 The :ref:`populate_sdk_* <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` and 3191 :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` classes use the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` 3192 for packaging up images and SDKs. 3193 3194 You should not set the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` manually. Rather, the 3195 variable is set indirectly through the appropriate 3196 :ref:`package_* <ref-classes-package>` class using the 3197 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` variable. The 3198 OpenEmbedded build system uses the first package type (e.g. DEB, RPM, 3199 or IPK) that appears with the variable 3200 3201 .. note:: 3202 3203 Files using the ``.tar`` format are never used as a substitute 3204 packaging format for DEB, RPM, and IPK formatted files for your image 3205 or SDK. 3206 3207 :term:`IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 3208 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 3209 system creates the final image output files. You can specify 3210 functions separated by semicolons: 3211 :: 3212 3213 IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 3214 3215 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the 3216 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 3217 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 3218 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 3219 information. 3220 3221 :term:`IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND` 3222 Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build 3223 system creates the final image output files. You can specify 3224 functions separated by semicolons: 3225 :: 3226 3227 IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 3228 3229 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the 3230 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 3231 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 3232 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 3233 information. 3234 3235 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` 3236 The location of the root filesystem while it is under construction 3237 (i.e. during the :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task). This 3238 variable is not configurable. Do not change it. 3239 3240 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_ALIGNMENT` 3241 Specifies the alignment for the output image file in Kbytes. If the 3242 size of the image is not a multiple of this value, then the size is 3243 rounded up to the nearest multiple of the value. The default value is 3244 "1". See :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` for 3245 additional information. 3246 3247 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` 3248 Defines additional free disk space created in the image in Kbytes. By 3249 default, this variable is set to "0". This free disk space is added 3250 to the image after the build system determines the image size as 3251 described in ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE``. 3252 3253 This variable is particularly useful when you want to ensure that a 3254 specific amount of free disk space is available on a device after an 3255 image is installed and running. For example, to be sure 5 Gbytes of 3256 free disk space is available, set the variable as follows: 3257 :: 3258 3259 IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "5242880" 3260 3261 For example, the Yocto Project Build Appliance specifically requests 3262 40 Gbytes of extra space with the line: 3263 :: 3264 3265 IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "41943040" 3266 3267 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` 3268 Defines the size in Kbytes for the generated image. The OpenEmbedded 3269 build system determines the final size for the generated image using 3270 an algorithm that takes into account the initial disk space used for 3271 the generated image, a requested size for the image, and requested 3272 additional free disk space to be added to the image. Programatically, 3273 the build system determines the final size of the generated image as 3274 follows: 3275 :: 3276 3277 if (image-du * overhead) < rootfs-size: 3278 internal-rootfs-size = rootfs-size + xspace 3279 else: 3280 internal-rootfs-size = (image-du * overhead) + xspace 3281 where: 3282 image-du = Returned value of the du command on the image. 3283 overhead = IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR 3284 rootfs-size = IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE 3285 internal-rootfs-size = Initial root filesystem size before any modifications. 3286 xspace = IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE 3287 3288 See the :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR` 3289 and :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` 3290 variables for related information. 3291 3292 :term:`IMAGE_TYPEDEP` 3293 Specifies a dependency from one image type on another. Here is an 3294 example from the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class: 3295 :: 3296 3297 IMAGE_TYPEDEP_live = "ext3" 3298 3299 In the previous example, the variable ensures that when "live" is 3300 listed with the :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable, 3301 the OpenEmbedded build system produces an ``ext3`` image first since 3302 one of the components of the live image is an ``ext3`` formatted 3303 partition containing the root filesystem. 3304 3305 :term:`IMAGE_TYPES` 3306 Specifies the complete list of supported image types by default: 3307 3308 - btrfs 3309 - container 3310 - cpio 3311 - cpio.gz 3312 - cpio.lz4 3313 - cpio.lzma 3314 - cpio.xz 3315 - cramfs 3316 - ext2 3317 - ext2.bz2 3318 - ext2.gz 3319 - ext2.lzma 3320 - ext3 3321 - ext3.gz 3322 - ext4 3323 - ext4.gz 3324 - f2fs 3325 - hddimg 3326 - iso 3327 - jffs2 3328 - jffs2.sum 3329 - multiubi 3330 - squashfs 3331 - squashfs-lz4 3332 - squashfs-lzo 3333 - squashfs-xz 3334 - tar 3335 - tar.bz2 3336 - tar.gz 3337 - tar.lz4 3338 - tar.xz 3339 - tar.zst 3340 - ubi 3341 - ubifs 3342 - wic 3343 - wic.bz2 3344 - wic.gz 3345 - wic.lzma 3346 3347 For more information about these types of images, see 3348 ``meta/classes/image_types*.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 3349 3350 :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` 3351 Version suffix that is part of the default :term:`IMAGE_NAME` and 3352 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` values. 3353 Defaults to ``"-${DATETIME}"``, however you could set this to a 3354 version string that comes from your external build environment if 3355 desired, and this suffix would then be used consistently across 3356 the build artifacts. 3357 3358 :term:`INC_PR` 3359 Helps define the recipe revision for recipes that share a common 3360 ``include`` file. You can think of this variable as part of the 3361 recipe revision as set from within an include file. 3362 3363 Suppose, for example, you have a set of recipes that are used across 3364 several projects. And, within each of those recipes the revision (its 3365 :term:`PR` value) is set accordingly. In this case, when 3366 the revision of those recipes changes, the burden is on you to find 3367 all those recipes and be sure that they get changed to reflect the 3368 updated version of the recipe. In this scenario, it can get 3369 complicated when recipes that are used in many places and provide 3370 common functionality are upgraded to a new revision. 3371 3372 A more efficient way of dealing with this situation is to set the 3373 ``INC_PR`` variable inside the ``include`` files that the recipes 3374 share and then expand the ``INC_PR`` variable within the recipes to 3375 help define the recipe revision. 3376 3377 The following provides an example that shows how to use the 3378 ``INC_PR`` variable given a common ``include`` file that defines the 3379 variable. Once the variable is defined in the ``include`` file, you 3380 can use the variable to set the ``PR`` values in each recipe. You 3381 will notice that when you set a recipe's ``PR`` you can provide more 3382 granular revisioning by appending values to the ``INC_PR`` variable: 3383 :: 3384 3385 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/xorg-font-common.inc:INC_PR = "r2" 3386 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/encodings_1.0.4.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.1" 3387 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-util_1.3.0.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.0" 3388 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-alias_1.0.3.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.3" 3389 3390 The 3391 first line of the example establishes the baseline revision to be 3392 used for all recipes that use the ``include`` file. The remaining 3393 lines in the example are from individual recipes and show how the 3394 ``PR`` value is set. 3395 3396 :term:`INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE` 3397 Specifies a space-separated list of license names (as they would 3398 appear in :term:`LICENSE`) that should be excluded 3399 from the build. Recipes that provide no alternatives to listed 3400 incompatible licenses are not built. Packages that are individually 3401 licensed with the specified incompatible licenses will be deleted. 3402 3403 .. note:: 3404 3405 This functionality is only regularly tested using the following 3406 setting: 3407 :: 3408 3409 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "GPL-3.0 LGPL-3.0 AGPL-3.0" 3410 3411 3412 Although you can use other settings, you might be required to 3413 remove dependencies on or provide alternatives to components that 3414 are required to produce a functional system image. 3415 3416 .. note:: 3417 3418 It is possible to define a list of licenses that are allowed to be 3419 used instead of the licenses that are excluded. To do this, define 3420 a variable ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` with the names of the licences 3421 that are allowed. Then define ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` as: 3422 :: 3423 3424 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "${@' '.join(sorted(set(d.getVar('AVAILABLE_LICENSES').split()) - set(d.getVar('COMPATIBLE_LICENSES').split())))}" 3425 3426 3427 This will result in ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` containing the names of 3428 all licences from :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` except the ones specified 3429 in ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` , thus only allowing the latter licences to 3430 be used. 3431 3432 :term:`INHERIT` 3433 Causes the named class or classes to be inherited globally. Anonymous 3434 functions in the class or classes are not executed for the base 3435 configuration and in each individual recipe. The OpenEmbedded build 3436 system ignores changes to ``INHERIT`` in individual recipes. 3437 3438 For more information on ``INHERIT``, see the 3439 :ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:\`\`inherit\`\` configuration directive`" 3440 section in the Bitbake User Manual. 3441 3442 :term:`INHERIT_DISTRO` 3443 Lists classes that will be inherited at the distribution level. It is 3444 unlikely that you want to edit this variable. 3445 3446 The default value of the variable is set as follows in the 3447 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` file: 3448 :: 3449 3450 INHERIT_DISTRO ?= "debian devshell sstate license" 3451 3452 :term:`INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS` 3453 Prevents the default dependencies, namely the C compiler and standard 3454 C library (libc), from being added to :term:`DEPENDS`. 3455 This variable is usually used within recipes that do not require any 3456 compilation using the C compiler. 3457 3458 Set the variable to "1" to prevent the default dependencies from 3459 being added. 3460 3461 :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT` 3462 Prevents the OpenEmbedded build system from splitting out debug 3463 information during packaging. By default, the build system splits out 3464 debugging information during the 3465 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. For more information on 3466 how debug information is split out, see the 3467 :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE` 3468 variable. 3469 3470 To prevent the build system from splitting out debug information 3471 during packaging, set the ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`` variable as 3472 follows: 3473 :: 3474 3475 INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT = "1" 3476 3477 :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP` 3478 If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in resulting 3479 packages and prevents the ``-dbg`` package from containing the source 3480 files. 3481 3482 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries and puts 3483 the debugging symbols into ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-dbg``. 3484 Consequently, you should not set ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`` when you 3485 plan to debug in general. 3486 3487 :term:`INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP` 3488 If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in the 3489 resulting sysroot. 3490 3491 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries in the 3492 resulting sysroot. When you specifically set the 3493 ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable to "1" in your recipe, you inhibit 3494 this stripping. 3495 3496 If you want to use this variable, include the 3497 :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. This class uses a 3498 ``sys_strip()`` function to test for the variable and acts 3499 accordingly. 3500 3501 .. note:: 3502 3503 Use of the ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable occurs in rare and 3504 special circumstances. For example, suppose you are building 3505 bare-metal firmware by using an external GCC toolchain. Furthermore, 3506 even if the toolchain's binaries are strippable, other files exist 3507 that are needed for the build that are not strippable. 3508 3509 :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES` 3510 Defines the format for the output image of an initial RAM filesystem 3511 (initramfs), which is used during boot. Supported formats are the 3512 same as those supported by the 3513 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable. 3514 3515 The default value of this variable, which is set in the 3516 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file in the 3517 :term:`Source Directory`, is "cpio.gz". The Linux kernel's 3518 initramfs mechanism, as opposed to the initial RAM filesystem 3519 `initrd <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Initrd>`__ mechanism, expects 3520 an optionally compressed cpio archive. 3521 3522 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` 3523 Specifies the :term:`PROVIDES` name of an image 3524 recipe that is used to build an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) 3525 image. In other words, the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable causes an 3526 additional recipe to be built as a dependency to whatever root 3527 filesystem recipe you might be using (e.g. ``core-image-sato``). The 3528 initramfs image recipe you provide should set 3529 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` to 3530 :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES`. 3531 3532 An initramfs image provides a temporary root filesystem used for 3533 early system initialization (e.g. loading of modules needed to locate 3534 and mount the "real" root filesystem). 3535 3536 .. note:: 3537 3538 See the ``meta/recipes-core/images/core-image-minimal-initramfs.bb`` 3539 recipe in the :term:`Source Directory` 3540 for an example initramfs recipe. To select this sample recipe as 3541 the one built to provide the initramfs image, set ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` 3542 to "core-image-minimal-initramfs". 3543 3544 You can also find more information by referencing the 3545 ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in 3546 the Source Directory, the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class, 3547 and the :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class to see how to use 3548 the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable. 3549 3550 If ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` is empty, which is the default, then no 3551 initramfs image is built. 3552 3553 For more information, you can also see the 3554 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` 3555 variable, which allows the generated image to be bundled inside the 3556 kernel image. Additionally, for information on creating an initramfs 3557 image, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 3558 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3559 3560 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` 3561 Controls whether or not the image recipe specified by 3562 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` is run through an 3563 extra pass 3564 (:ref:`ref-tasks-bundle_initramfs`) during 3565 kernel compilation in order to build a single binary that contains 3566 both the kernel image and the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) 3567 image. This makes use of the 3568 :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` kernel 3569 feature. 3570 3571 .. note:: 3572 3573 Using an extra compilation pass to bundle the initramfs avoids a 3574 circular dependency between the kernel recipe and the initramfs 3575 recipe should the initramfs include kernel modules. Should that be 3576 the case, the initramfs recipe depends on the kernel for the 3577 kernel modules, and the kernel depends on the initramfs recipe 3578 since the initramfs is bundled inside the kernel image. 3579 3580 The combined binary is deposited into the ``tmp/deploy`` directory, 3581 which is part of the :term:`Build Directory`. 3582 3583 Setting the variable to "1" in a configuration file causes the 3584 OpenEmbedded build system to generate a kernel image with the 3585 initramfs specified in ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` bundled within: 3586 :: 3587 3588 INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE = "1" 3589 3590 By default, the 3591 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class sets this variable to a 3592 null string as follows: 3593 :: 3594 3595 INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE ?= "" 3596 3597 .. note:: 3598 3599 You must set the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`` variable in a 3600 configuration file. You cannot set the variable in a recipe file. 3601 3602 See the 3603 :yocto_git:`local.conf.sample.extended </poky/tree/meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended>` 3604 file for additional information. Also, for information on creating an 3605 initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 3606 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3607 3608 :term:`INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME` 3609 The link name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is 3610 set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3611 follows: 3612 :: 3613 3614 INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3615 3616 The value of the 3617 ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3618 file, has the following value: 3619 :: 3620 3621 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3622 3623 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3624 information. 3625 3626 :term:`INITRAMFS_NAME` 3627 The base name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is 3628 set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3629 follows: 3630 :: 3631 3632 INITRAMFS_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3633 3634 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3635 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3636 :: 3637 3638 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3639 3640 :term:`INITRD` 3641 Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use as an 3642 initial RAM disk (``initrd``). 3643 3644 The ``INITRD`` variable is an optional variable used with the 3645 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class. 3646 3647 :term:`INITRD_IMAGE` 3648 When building a "live" bootable image (i.e. when 3649 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains "live"), 3650 ``INITRD_IMAGE`` specifies the image recipe that should be built to 3651 provide the initial RAM disk image. The default value is 3652 "core-image-minimal-initramfs". 3653 3654 See the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class for more 3655 information. 3656 3657 :term:`INITSCRIPT_NAME` 3658 The filename of the initialization script as installed to 3659 ``${sysconfdir}/init.d``. 3660 3661 This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``. 3662 The variable is mandatory. 3663 3664 :term:`INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES` 3665 A list of the packages that contain initscripts. If multiple packages 3666 are specified, you need to append the package name to the other 3667 ``INITSCRIPT_*`` as an override. 3668 3669 This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``. 3670 The variable is optional and defaults to the :term:`PN` 3671 variable. 3672 3673 :term:`INITSCRIPT_PARAMS` 3674 Specifies the options to pass to ``update-rc.d``. Here is an example: 3675 :: 3676 3677 INITSCRIPT_PARAMS = "start 99 5 2 . stop 20 0 1 6 ." 3678 3679 In this example, the script has a runlevel of 99, starts the script 3680 in initlevels 2 and 5, and stops the script in levels 0, 1 and 6. 3681 3682 The variable's default value is "defaults", which is set in the 3683 :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class. 3684 3685 The value in ``INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`` is passed through to the 3686 ``update-rc.d`` command. For more information on valid parameters, 3687 please see the ``update-rc.d`` manual page at 3688 https://manpages.debian.org/buster/init-system-helpers/update-rc.d.8.en.html 3689 3690 :term:`INSANE_SKIP` 3691 Specifies the QA checks to skip for a specific package within a 3692 recipe. For example, to skip the check for symbolic link ``.so`` 3693 files in the main package of a recipe, add the following to the 3694 recipe. The package name override must be used, which in this example 3695 is ``${PN}``: 3696 :: 3697 3698 INSANE_SKIP_${PN} += "dev-so" 3699 3700 See the ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section for a 3701 list of the valid QA checks you can specify using this variable. 3702 3703 :term:`INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE` 3704 By default, the ``tzdata`` recipe packages an ``/etc/timezone`` file. 3705 Set the ``INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE`` variable to "0" at the 3706 configuration level to disable this behavior. 3707 3708 :term:`IPK_FEED_URIS` 3709 When the IPK backend is in use and package management is enabled on 3710 the target, you can use this variable to set up ``opkg`` in the 3711 target image to point to package feeds on a nominated server. Once 3712 the feed is established, you can perform installations or upgrades 3713 using the package manager at runtime. 3714 3715 :term:`KARCH` 3716 Defines the kernel architecture used when assembling the 3717 configuration. Architectures supported for this release are: 3718 3719 - powerpc 3720 - i386 3721 - x86_64 3722 - arm 3723 - qemu 3724 - mips 3725 3726 You define the ``KARCH`` variable in the :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. 3727 3728 :term:`KBRANCH` 3729 A regular expression used by the build process to explicitly identify 3730 the kernel branch that is validated, patched, and configured during a 3731 build. You must set this variable to ensure the exact kernel branch 3732 you want is being used by the build process. 3733 3734 Values for this variable are set in the kernel's recipe file and the 3735 kernel's append file. For example, if you are using the 3736 ``linux-yocto_4.12`` kernel, the kernel recipe file is the 3737 ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bb`` file. ``KBRANCH`` 3738 is set as follows in that kernel recipe file: 3739 :: 3740 3741 KBRANCH ?= "standard/base" 3742 3743 This variable is also used from the kernel's append file to identify 3744 the kernel branch specific to a particular machine or target 3745 hardware. Continuing with the previous kernel example, the kernel's 3746 append file (i.e. ``linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``) is located in the 3747 BSP layer for a given machine. For example, the append file for the 3748 Beaglebone, EdgeRouter, and generic versions of both 32 and 64-bit IA 3749 machines (``meta-yocto-bsp``) is named 3750 ``meta-yocto-bsp/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``. 3751 Here are the related statements from that append file: 3752 :: 3753 3754 KBRANCH_genericx86 = "standard/base" 3755 KBRANCH_genericx86-64 = "standard/base" 3756 KBRANCH_edgerouter = "standard/edgerouter" 3757 KBRANCH_beaglebone = "standard/beaglebone" 3758 3759 The ``KBRANCH`` statements 3760 identify the kernel branch to use when building for each supported 3761 BSP. 3762 3763 :term:`KBUILD_DEFCONFIG` 3764 When used with the :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` 3765 class, specifies an "in-tree" kernel configuration file for use 3766 during a kernel build. 3767 3768 Typically, when using a ``defconfig`` to configure a kernel during a 3769 build, you place the file in your layer in the same manner as you 3770 would place patch files and configuration fragment files (i.e. 3771 "out-of-tree"). However, if you want to use a ``defconfig`` file that 3772 is part of the kernel tree (i.e. "in-tree"), you can use the 3773 ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable and append the 3774 :term:`KMACHINE` variable to point to the 3775 ``defconfig`` file. 3776 3777 To use the variable, set it in the append file for your kernel recipe 3778 using the following form: 3779 :: 3780 3781 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_KMACHINE ?= defconfig_file 3782 3783 Here is an example from a "raspberrypi2" ``KMACHINE`` build that uses 3784 a ``defconfig`` file named "bcm2709_defconfig": 3785 :: 3786 3787 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_raspberrypi2 = "bcm2709_defconfig" 3788 3789 As an alternative, you can use the following within your append file: 3790 :: 3791 3792 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_pn-linux-yocto ?= defconfig_file 3793 3794 For more 3795 information on how to use the ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable, see the 3796 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:using an "in-tree" \`\`defconfig\`\` file`" 3797 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 3798 3799 :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` 3800 Specifies an alternate kernel image type for creation in addition to 3801 the kernel image type specified using the 3802 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` variable. 3803 3804 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3805 Specifies the name of all of the build artifacts. You can change the 3806 name of the artifacts by changing the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`` 3807 variable. 3808 3809 The value of ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME``, which is set in the 3810 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file, has the 3811 following default value: 3812 :: 3813 3814 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3815 3816 See the :term:`PKGE`, :term:`PKGV`, :term:`PKGR`, :term:`MACHINE` 3817 and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` variables for additional information. 3818 3819 :term:`KERNEL_CLASSES` 3820 A list of classes defining kernel image types that the 3821 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class should inherit. You 3822 typically append this variable to enable extended image types. An 3823 example is the "kernel-fitimage", which enables fitImage support and 3824 resides in ``meta/classes/kernel-fitimage.bbclass``. You can register 3825 custom kernel image types with the ``kernel`` class using this 3826 variable. 3827 3828 :term:`KERNEL_DEVICETREE` 3829 Specifies the name of the generated Linux kernel device tree (i.e. 3830 the ``.dtb``) file. 3831 3832 .. note:: 3833 3834 Legacy support exists for specifying the full path to the device 3835 tree. However, providing just the ``.dtb`` file is preferred. 3836 3837 In order to use this variable, the 3838 :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must 3839 be inherited. 3840 3841 :term:`KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME` 3842 The link name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable 3843 is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3844 follows: 3845 :: 3846 3847 KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3848 3849 The 3850 value of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in 3851 the same file, has the following value: 3852 :: 3853 3854 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3855 3856 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3857 information. 3858 3859 :term:`KERNEL_DTB_NAME` 3860 The base name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable 3861 is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3862 follows: 3863 :: 3864 3865 KERNEL_DTB_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3866 3867 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3868 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3869 :: 3870 3871 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3872 3873 :term:`KERNEL_EXTRA_ARGS` 3874 Specifies additional ``make`` command-line arguments the OpenEmbedded 3875 build system passes on when compiling the kernel. 3876 3877 :term:`KERNEL_FEATURES` 3878 Includes additional kernel metadata. In the OpenEmbedded build 3879 system, the default Board Support Packages (BSPs) 3880 :term:`Metadata` is provided through the 3881 :term:`KMACHINE` and :term:`KBRANCH` 3882 variables. You can use the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` variable from within 3883 the kernel recipe or kernel append file to further add metadata for 3884 all BSPs or specific BSPs. 3885 3886 The metadata you add through this variable includes config fragments 3887 and features descriptions, which usually includes patches as well as 3888 config fragments. You typically override the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` 3889 variable for a specific machine. In this way, you can provide 3890 validated, but optional, sets of kernel configurations and features. 3891 3892 For example, the following example from the ``linux-yocto-rt_4.12`` 3893 kernel recipe adds "netfilter" and "taskstats" features to all BSPs 3894 as well as "virtio" configurations to all QEMU machines. The last two 3895 statements add specific configurations to targeted machine types: 3896 :: 3897 3898 KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES ?= "features/netfilter/netfilter.scc features/taskstats/taskstats.scc" 3899 KERNEL_FEATURES_append = "${KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES}" 3900 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemuall = "cfg/virtio.scc" 3901 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86 = " cfg/sound.scc cfg/paravirt_kvm.scc" 3902 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86-64 = "cfg/sound.scc" 3903 3904 :term:`KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME` 3905 The link name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This 3906 variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` 3907 file as follows: 3908 :: 3909 3910 KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3911 3912 The value of the 3913 ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3914 file, has the following value: 3915 :: 3916 3917 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3918 3919 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3920 information. 3921 3922 :term:`KERNEL_FIT_NAME` 3923 The base name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This 3924 variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` 3925 file as follows: 3926 :: 3927 3928 KERNEL_FIT_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3929 3930 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3931 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3932 :: 3933 3934 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3935 3936 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME` 3937 The link name for the kernel image. This variable is set in the 3938 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 3939 :: 3940 3941 KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3942 3943 The value of 3944 the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3945 file, has the following value: 3946 :: 3947 3948 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3949 3950 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3951 information. 3952 3953 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE` 3954 Specifies the maximum size of the kernel image file in kilobytes. If 3955 ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is set, the size of the kernel image file is 3956 checked against the set value during the 3957 :ref:`ref-tasks-sizecheck` task. The task fails if 3958 the kernel image file is larger than the setting. 3959 3960 ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is useful for target devices that have a 3961 limited amount of space in which the kernel image must be stored. 3962 3963 By default, this variable is not set, which means the size of the 3964 kernel image is not checked. 3965 3966 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME` 3967 The base name of the kernel image. This variable is set in the 3968 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 3969 :: 3970 3971 KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3972 3973 The value of the 3974 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable, 3975 which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3976 :: 3977 3978 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3979 3980 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` 3981 The type of kernel to build for a device, usually set by the machine 3982 configuration files and defaults to "zImage". This variable is used 3983 when building the kernel and is passed to ``make`` as the target to 3984 build. 3985 3986 If you want to build an alternate kernel image type, use the 3987 :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` variable. 3988 3989 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` 3990 Lists kernel modules that need to be auto-loaded during boot. 3991 3992 .. note:: 3993 3994 This variable replaces the deprecated :term:`module_autoload` 3995 variable. 3996 3997 You can use the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` variable anywhere that it 3998 can be recognized by the kernel recipe or by an out-of-tree kernel 3999 module recipe (e.g. a machine configuration file, a distribution 4000 configuration file, an append file for the recipe, or the recipe 4001 itself). 4002 4003 Specify it as follows: 4004 :: 4005 4006 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name1 module_name2 module_name3" 4007 4008 Including ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` causes the OpenEmbedded build 4009 system to populate the ``/etc/modules-load.d/modname.conf`` file with 4010 the list of modules to be auto-loaded on boot. The modules appear 4011 one-per-line in the file. Here is an example of the most common use 4012 case: 4013 :: 4014 4015 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name" 4016 4017 For information on how to populate the ``modname.conf`` file with 4018 ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` variable. 4019 4020 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` 4021 Provides a list of modules for which the OpenEmbedded build system 4022 expects to find ``module_conf_``\ modname values that specify 4023 configuration for each of the modules. For information on how to 4024 provide those module configurations, see the 4025 :term:`module_conf_* <module_conf>` variable. 4026 4027 :term:`KERNEL_PATH` 4028 The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value 4029 of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within 4030 the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on 4031 how this variable is used, see the 4032 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`" 4033 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 4034 4035 To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build 4036 modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the 4037 :term:`KERNEL_SRC` variable, which is identical to 4038 the ``KERNEL_PATH`` variable. Both variables are common variables 4039 used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory. 4040 4041 :term:`KERNEL_SRC` 4042 The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value 4043 of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within 4044 the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on 4045 how this variable is used, see the 4046 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`" 4047 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 4048 4049 To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build 4050 modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the 4051 :term:`KERNEL_PATH` variable, which is identical 4052 to the ``KERNEL_SRC`` variable. Both variables are common variables 4053 used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory. 4054 4055 :term:`KERNEL_VERSION` 4056 Specifies the version of the kernel as extracted from ``version.h`` 4057 or ``utsrelease.h`` within the kernel sources. Effects of setting 4058 this variable do not take affect until the kernel has been 4059 configured. Consequently, attempting to refer to this variable in 4060 contexts prior to configuration will not work. 4061 4062 :term:`KERNELDEPMODDEPEND` 4063 Specifies whether the data referenced through 4064 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` is needed or not. The 4065 ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` does not control whether or not that data 4066 exists, but simply whether or not it is used. If you do not need to 4067 use the data, set the ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` variable in your 4068 ``initramfs`` recipe. Setting the variable there when the data is not 4069 needed avoids a potential dependency loop. 4070 4071 :term:`KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION` 4072 Provides a short description of a configuration fragment. You use 4073 this variable in the ``.scc`` file that describes a configuration 4074 fragment file. Here is the variable used in a file named ``smp.scc`` 4075 to describe SMP being enabled: 4076 :: 4077 4078 define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable SMP" 4079 4080 :term:`KMACHINE` 4081 The machine as known by the kernel. Sometimes the machine name used 4082 by the kernel does not match the machine name used by the 4083 OpenEmbedded build system. For example, the machine name that the 4084 OpenEmbedded build system understands as ``core2-32-intel-common`` 4085 goes by a different name in the Linux Yocto kernel. The kernel 4086 understands that machine as ``intel-core2-32``. For cases like these, 4087 the ``KMACHINE`` variable maps the kernel machine name to the 4088 OpenEmbedded build system machine name. 4089 4090 These mappings between different names occur in the Yocto Linux 4091 Kernel's ``meta`` branch. As an example take a look in the 4092 ``common/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bbappend`` file: 4093 :: 4094 4095 LINUX_VERSION_core2-32-intel-common = "3.19.0" 4096 COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "${MACHINE}" 4097 SRCREV_meta_core2-32-intel-common = "8897ef68b30e7426bc1d39895e71fb155d694974" 4098 SRCREV_machine_core2-32-intel-common = "43b9eced9ba8a57add36af07736344dcc383f711" 4099 KMACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "intel-core2-32" 4100 KBRANCH_core2-32-intel-common = "standard/base" 4101 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_core2-32-intel-common = "${KERNEL_FEATURES_INTEL_COMMON}" 4102 4103 The ``KMACHINE`` statement says 4104 that the kernel understands the machine name as "intel-core2-32". 4105 However, the OpenEmbedded build system understands the machine as 4106 "core2-32-intel-common". 4107 4108 :term:`KTYPE` 4109 Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. 4110 The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" 4111 kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`" 4112 section in the 4113 Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on 4114 kernel types. 4115 4116 You define the ``KTYPE`` variable in the 4117 :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. The 4118 value you use must match the value used for the 4119 :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` value used by the 4120 kernel recipe. 4121 4122 :term:`LABELS` 4123 Provides a list of targets for automatic configuration. 4124 4125 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 4126 information on how this variable is used. 4127 4128 :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` 4129 Lists the layers, separated by spaces, on which this recipe depends. 4130 Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a dependency 4131 by adding it to the end of the layer name. Here is an example: 4132 :: 4133 4134 LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)" 4135 4136 In this previous example, 4137 version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared against 4138 :term:`LAYERVERSION`\ ``_anotherlayer``. 4139 4140 An error is produced if any dependency is missing or the version 4141 numbers (if specified) do not match exactly. This variable is used in 4142 the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the name of 4143 the specific layer (e.g. ``LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer``). 4144 4145 :term:`LAYERDIR` 4146 When used inside the ``layer.conf`` configuration file, this variable 4147 provides the path of the current layer. This variable is not 4148 available outside of ``layer.conf`` and references are expanded 4149 immediately when parsing of the file completes. 4150 4151 :term:`LAYERRECOMMENDS` 4152 Lists the layers, separated by spaces, recommended for use with this 4153 layer. 4154 4155 Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a 4156 recommendation by adding the version to the end of the layer name. 4157 Here is an example: 4158 :: 4159 4160 LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)" 4161 4162 In this previous example, version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared 4163 against ``LAYERVERSION_anotherlayer``. 4164 4165 This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be 4166 suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g. 4167 ``LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer``). 4168 4169 :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT` 4170 Lists the versions of the :term:`OpenEmbedded-Core (OE-Core)` for which 4171 a layer is compatible. Using the ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` variable 4172 allows the layer maintainer to indicate which combinations of the 4173 layer and OE-Core can be expected to work. The variable gives the 4174 system a way to detect when a layer has not been tested with new 4175 releases of OE-Core (e.g. the layer is not maintained). 4176 4177 To specify the OE-Core versions for which a layer is compatible, use 4178 this variable in your layer's ``conf/layer.conf`` configuration file. 4179 For the list, use the Yocto Project 4180 :yocto_wiki:`Release Name </Releases>` (e.g. 4181 DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP). To specify multiple OE-Core versions for the 4182 layer, use a space-separated list: 4183 :: 4184 4185 LAYERSERIES_COMPAT_layer_root_name = "DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE" 4186 4187 .. note:: 4188 4189 Setting ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` is required by the Yocto Project 4190 Compatible version 2 standard. 4191 The OpenEmbedded build system produces a warning if the variable 4192 is not set for any given layer. 4193 4194 See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating your own layer`" 4195 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4196 4197 :term:`LAYERVERSION` 4198 Optionally specifies the version of a layer as a single number. You 4199 can use this within :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` for 4200 another layer in order to depend on a specific version of the layer. 4201 This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be 4202 suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g. 4203 ``LAYERVERSION_mylayer``). 4204 4205 :term:`LD` 4206 The minimal command and arguments used to run the linker. 4207 4208 :term:`LDFLAGS` 4209 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker. This variable is exported 4210 to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software 4211 being built during the compilation step. 4212 4213 Default initialization for ``LDFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 4214 being built: 4215 4216 - :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` when building for the 4217 target 4218 4219 - :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` when building for the 4220 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 4221 4222 - :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` when building for 4223 an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 4224 4225 :term:`LEAD_SONAME` 4226 Specifies the lead (or primary) compiled library file (i.e. ``.so``) 4227 that the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class applies its 4228 naming policy to given a recipe that packages multiple libraries. 4229 4230 This variable works in conjunction with the ``debian`` class. 4231 4232 :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` 4233 Checksums of the license text in the recipe source code. 4234 4235 This variable tracks changes in license text of the source code 4236 files. If the license text is changed, it will trigger a build 4237 failure, which gives the developer an opportunity to review any 4238 license change. 4239 4240 This variable must be defined for all recipes (unless 4241 :term:`LICENSE` is set to "CLOSED"). 4242 4243 For more information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:tracking license changes`" 4244 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4245 4246 :term:`LICENSE` 4247 The list of source licenses for the recipe. Follow these rules: 4248 4249 - Do not use spaces within individual license names. 4250 4251 - Separate license names using \| (pipe) when there is a choice 4252 between licenses. 4253 4254 - Separate license names using & (ampersand) when multiple licenses 4255 exist that cover different parts of the source. 4256 4257 - You can use spaces between license names. 4258 4259 - For standard licenses, use the names of the files in 4260 ``meta/files/common-licenses/`` or the 4261 :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` flag names defined in 4262 ``meta/conf/licenses.conf``. 4263 4264 Here are some examples: 4265 :: 4266 4267 LICENSE = "LGPLv2.1 | GPLv3" 4268 LICENSE = "MPL-1 & LGPLv2.1" 4269 LICENSE = "GPLv2+" 4270 4271 The first example is from the 4272 recipes for Qt, which the user may choose to distribute under either 4273 the LGPL version 2.1 or GPL version 3. The second example is from 4274 Cairo where two licenses cover different parts of the source code. 4275 The final example is from ``sysstat``, which presents a single 4276 license. 4277 4278 You can also specify licenses on a per-package basis to handle 4279 situations where components of the output have different licenses. 4280 For example, a piece of software whose code is licensed under GPLv2 4281 but has accompanying documentation licensed under the GNU Free 4282 Documentation License 1.2 could be specified as follows: 4283 :: 4284 4285 LICENSE = "GFDL-1.2 & GPLv2" 4286 LICENSE_${PN} = "GPLv2" 4287 LICENSE_${PN}-doc = "GFDL-1.2" 4288 4289 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` 4290 Setting ``LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`` to "1" causes the OpenEmbedded 4291 build system to create an extra package (i.e. 4292 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-lic``) for each recipe and to add 4293 those packages to the 4294 :term:`RRECOMMENDS`\ ``_${PN}``. 4295 4296 The ``${PN}-lic`` package installs a directory in 4297 ``/usr/share/licenses`` named ``${PN}``, which is the recipe's base 4298 name, and installs files in that directory that contain license and 4299 copyright information (i.e. copies of the appropriate license files 4300 from ``meta/common-licenses`` that match the licenses specified in 4301 the :term:`LICENSE` variable of the recipe metadata 4302 and copies of files marked in 4303 :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` as containing 4304 license text). 4305 4306 For related information on providing license text, see the 4307 :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` variable, the 4308 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, and the 4309 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 4310 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4311 4312 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` 4313 Specifies additional flags for a recipe you must whitelist through 4314 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` in 4315 order to allow the recipe to be built. When providing multiple flags, 4316 separate them with spaces. 4317 4318 This value is independent of :term:`LICENSE` and is 4319 typically used to mark recipes that might require additional licenses 4320 in order to be used in a commercial product. For more information, 4321 see the 4322 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`" 4323 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4324 4325 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` 4326 Lists license flags that when specified in 4327 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` within a recipe should not 4328 prevent that recipe from being built. This practice is otherwise 4329 known as "whitelisting" license flags. For more information, see the 4330 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`" 4331 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4332 4333 :term:`LICENSE_PATH` 4334 Path to additional licenses used during the build. By default, the 4335 OpenEmbedded build system uses ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` to define the 4336 directory that holds common license text used during the build. The 4337 ``LICENSE_PATH`` variable allows you to extend that location to other 4338 areas that have additional licenses: 4339 :: 4340 4341 LICENSE_PATH += "path-to-additional-common-licenses" 4342 4343 :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` 4344 Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. 4345 The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" 4346 kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`" 4347 section in the 4348 Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on 4349 kernel types. 4350 4351 If you do not specify a ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE``, it defaults to 4352 "standard". Together with :term:`KMACHINE`, the 4353 ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE`` variable defines the search arguments used by 4354 the kernel tools to find the appropriate description within the 4355 kernel :term:`Metadata` with which to build out the sources 4356 and configuration. 4357 4358 :term:`LINUX_VERSION` 4359 The Linux version from ``kernel.org`` on which the Linux kernel image 4360 being built using the OpenEmbedded build system is based. You define 4361 this variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the 4362 ``linux-yocto-3.4.bb`` kernel recipe found in 4363 ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux`` defines the variables as follows: 4364 :: 4365 4366 LINUX_VERSION ?= "3.4.24" 4367 4368 The ``LINUX_VERSION`` variable is used to define :term:`PV` 4369 for the recipe: 4370 :: 4371 4372 PV = "${LINUX_VERSION}+git${SRCPV}" 4373 4374 :term:`LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION` 4375 A string extension compiled into the version string of the Linux 4376 kernel built with the OpenEmbedded build system. You define this 4377 variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the linux-yocto kernel 4378 recipes all define the variable as follows: 4379 :: 4380 4381 LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION ?= "-yocto-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}" 4382 4383 Defining this variable essentially sets the Linux kernel 4384 configuration item ``CONFIG_LOCALVERSION``, which is visible through 4385 the ``uname`` command. Here is an example that shows the extension 4386 assuming it was set as previously shown: 4387 :: 4388 4389 $ uname -r 4390 3.7.0-rc8-custom 4391 4392 :term:`LOG_DIR` 4393 Specifies the directory to which the OpenEmbedded build system writes 4394 overall log files. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/log``. 4395 4396 For the directory containing logs specific to each task, see the 4397 :term:`T` variable. 4398 4399 :term:`MACHINE` 4400 Specifies the target device for which the image is built. You define 4401 ``MACHINE`` in the ``local.conf`` file found in the 4402 :term:`Build Directory`. By default, ``MACHINE`` is set to 4403 "qemux86", which is an x86-based architecture machine to be emulated 4404 using QEMU: 4405 :: 4406 4407 MACHINE ?= "qemux86" 4408 4409 The variable corresponds to a machine configuration file of the same 4410 name, through which machine-specific configurations are set. Thus, 4411 when ``MACHINE`` is set to "qemux86" there exists the corresponding 4412 ``qemux86.conf`` machine configuration file, which can be found in 4413 the :term:`Source Directory` in 4414 ``meta/conf/machine``. 4415 4416 The list of machines supported by the Yocto Project as shipped 4417 include the following: 4418 :: 4419 4420 MACHINE ?= "qemuarm" 4421 MACHINE ?= "qemuarm64" 4422 MACHINE ?= "qemumips" 4423 MACHINE ?= "qemumips64" 4424 MACHINE ?= "qemuppc" 4425 MACHINE ?= "qemux86" 4426 MACHINE ?= "qemux86-64" 4427 MACHINE ?= "genericx86" 4428 MACHINE ?= "genericx86-64" 4429 MACHINE ?= "beaglebone" 4430 MACHINE ?= "edgerouter" 4431 4432 The last five are Yocto Project reference hardware 4433 boards, which are provided in the ``meta-yocto-bsp`` layer. 4434 4435 .. note:: 4436 4437 Adding additional Board Support Package (BSP) layers to your 4438 configuration adds new possible settings for ``MACHINE``. 4439 4440 :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` 4441 Specifies the name of the machine-specific architecture. This 4442 variable is set automatically from :term:`MACHINE` or 4443 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH`. You should not hand-edit 4444 the ``MACHINE_ARCH`` variable. 4445 4446 :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 4447 A list of required machine-specific packages to install as part of 4448 the image being built. The build process depends on these packages 4449 being present. Furthermore, because this is a "machine-essential" 4450 variable, the list of packages are essential for the machine to boot. 4451 The impact of this variable affects images based on 4452 ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal`` 4453 image. 4454 4455 This variable is similar to the 4456 ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable with the exception 4457 that the image being built has a build dependency on the variable's 4458 list of packages. In other words, the image will not build if a file 4459 in this list is not found. 4460 4461 As an example, suppose the machine for which you are building 4462 requires ``example-init`` to be run during boot to initialize the 4463 hardware. In this case, you would use the following in the machine's 4464 ``.conf`` configuration file: 4465 :: 4466 4467 MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "example-init" 4468 4469 :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 4470 A list of recommended machine-specific packages to install as part of 4471 the image being built. The build process does not depend on these 4472 packages being present. However, because this is a 4473 "machine-essential" variable, the list of packages are essential for 4474 the machine to boot. The impact of this variable affects images based 4475 on ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal`` 4476 image. 4477 4478 This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` 4479 variable with the exception that the image being built does not have 4480 a build dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other 4481 words, the image will still build if a package in this list is not 4482 found. Typically, this variable is used to handle essential kernel 4483 modules, whose functionality may be selected to be built into the 4484 kernel rather than as a module, in which case a package will not be 4485 produced. 4486 4487 Consider an example where you have a custom kernel where a specific 4488 touchscreen driver is required for the machine to be usable. However, 4489 the driver can be built as a module or into the kernel depending on 4490 the kernel configuration. If the driver is built as a module, you 4491 want it to be installed. But, when the driver is built into the 4492 kernel, you still want the build to succeed. This variable sets up a 4493 "recommends" relationship so that in the latter case, the build will 4494 not fail due to the missing package. To accomplish this, assuming the 4495 package for the module was called ``kernel-module-ab123``, you would 4496 use the following in the machine's ``.conf`` configuration file: 4497 :: 4498 4499 MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-ab123" 4500 4501 .. note:: 4502 4503 In this example, the ``kernel-module-ab123`` recipe needs to 4504 explicitly set its :term:`PACKAGES` variable to ensure that BitBake 4505 does not use the kernel recipe's :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variable to 4506 satisfy the dependency. 4507 4508 Some examples of these machine essentials are flash, screen, 4509 keyboard, mouse, or touchscreen drivers (depending on the machine). 4510 4511 :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 4512 A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image 4513 being built that are not essential for the machine to boot. However, 4514 the build process for more fully-featured images depends on the 4515 packages being present. 4516 4517 This variable affects all images based on ``packagegroup-base``, 4518 which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or 4519 ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images. 4520 4521 The variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable 4522 with the exception that the image being built has a build dependency 4523 on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the image will 4524 not build if a file in this list is not found. 4525 4526 An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential 4527 for the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a 4528 more fully-featured image, you want to enable the WiFi. The package 4529 containing the firmware for the WiFi hardware is always expected to 4530 exist, so it is acceptable for the build process to depend upon 4531 finding the package. In this case, assuming the package for the 4532 firmware was called ``wifidriver-firmware``, you would use the 4533 following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine: 4534 :: 4535 4536 MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "wifidriver-firmware" 4537 4538 :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 4539 A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image 4540 being built that are not essential for booting the machine. The image 4541 being built has no build dependency on this list of packages. 4542 4543 This variable affects only images based on ``packagegroup-base``, 4544 which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or 4545 ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images. 4546 4547 This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` variable 4548 with the exception that the image being built does not have a build 4549 dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the 4550 image will build if a file in this list is not found. 4551 4552 An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential 4553 For the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a 4554 more fully-featured image, you want to enable WiFi. In this case, the 4555 package containing the WiFi kernel module will not be produced if the 4556 WiFi driver is built into the kernel, in which case you still want 4557 the build to succeed instead of failing as a result of the package 4558 not being found. To accomplish this, assuming the package for the 4559 module was called ``kernel-module-examplewifi``, you would use the 4560 following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine: 4561 :: 4562 4563 MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-examplewifi" 4564 4565 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` 4566 Specifies the list of hardware features the 4567 :term:`MACHINE` is capable of supporting. For related 4568 information on enabling features, see the 4569 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`, 4570 :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES`, and 4571 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variables. 4572 4573 For a list of hardware features supported by the Yocto Project as 4574 shipped, see the ":ref:`ref-features-machine`" section. 4575 4576 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL` 4577 Features to be added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES`` if not also present in 4578 ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``. 4579 4580 This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is 4581 not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference 4582 the variable to see which machine features are being backfilled for 4583 all machine configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" 4584 section for more information. 4585 4586 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED` 4587 Features from ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be 4588 backfilled (i.e. added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES``) during the build. See 4589 the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information. 4590 4591 :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES` 4592 A colon-separated list of overrides that apply to the current 4593 machine. By default, this list includes the value of 4594 :term:`MACHINE`. 4595 4596 You can extend ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that 4597 should apply to a machine. For example, all machines emulated in QEMU 4598 (e.g. ``qemuarm``, ``qemux86``, and so forth) include a file named 4599 ``meta/conf/machine/include/qemu.inc`` that prepends the following 4600 override to ``MACHINEOVERRIDES``: 4601 :: 4602 4603 MACHINEOVERRIDES =. "qemuall:" 4604 4605 This 4606 override allows variables to be overridden for all machines emulated 4607 in QEMU, like in the following example from the ``connman-conf`` 4608 recipe: 4609 :: 4610 4611 SRC_URI_append_qemuall = " file://wired.config \ 4612 file://wired-setup \ 4613 " 4614 4615 The underlying mechanism behind 4616 ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` is simply that it is included in the default 4617 value of :term:`OVERRIDES`. 4618 4619 :term:`MAINTAINER` 4620 The email address of the distribution maintainer. 4621 4622 :term:`MIRRORS` 4623 Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system 4624 gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it 4625 first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the 4626 build system tries locations defined by 4627 :term:`PREMIRRORS`, the upstream source, and then 4628 locations specified by ``MIRRORS`` in that order. 4629 4630 Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky", 4631 the default value for ``MIRRORS`` is defined in the 4632 ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository. 4633 4634 :term:`MLPREFIX` 4635 Specifies a prefix has been added to :term:`PN` to create a 4636 special version of a recipe or package (i.e. a Multilib version). The 4637 variable is used in places where the prefix needs to be added to or 4638 removed from a the name (e.g. the :term:`BPN` variable). 4639 ``MLPREFIX`` gets set when a prefix has been added to ``PN``. 4640 4641 .. note:: 4642 4643 The "ML" in ``MLPREFIX`` stands for "MultiLib". This representation is 4644 historical and comes from a time when ``nativesdk`` was a suffix 4645 rather than a prefix on the recipe name. When ``nativesdk`` was turned 4646 into a prefix, it made sense to set ``MLPREFIX`` for it as well. 4647 4648 To help understand when ``MLPREFIX`` might be needed, consider when 4649 :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` is used to provide a 4650 ``nativesdk`` version of a recipe in addition to the target version. 4651 If that recipe declares build-time dependencies on tasks in other 4652 recipes by using :term:`DEPENDS`, then a dependency on 4653 "foo" will automatically get rewritten to a dependency on 4654 "nativesdk-foo". However, dependencies like the following will not 4655 get rewritten automatically: 4656 :: 4657 4658 do_foo[depends] += "recipe:do_foo" 4659 4660 If you want such a dependency to also get transformed, you can do the 4661 following: 4662 :: 4663 4664 do_foo[depends] += "${MLPREFIX}recipe:do_foo" 4665 4666 module_autoload 4667 This variable has been replaced by the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` 4668 variable. You should replace all occurrences of ``module_autoload`` 4669 with additions to ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD``, for example: 4670 :: 4671 4672 module_autoload_rfcomm = "rfcomm" 4673 4674 should now be replaced with: 4675 :: 4676 4677 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "rfcomm" 4678 4679 See the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable for more information. 4680 4681 module_conf 4682 Specifies `modprobe.d <http://linux.die.net/man/5/modprobe.d>`_ 4683 syntax lines for inclusion in the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` 4684 file. 4685 4686 You can use this variable anywhere that it can be recognized by the 4687 kernel recipe or out-of-tree kernel module recipe (e.g. a machine 4688 configuration file, a distribution configuration file, an append file 4689 for the recipe, or the recipe itself). If you use this variable, you 4690 must also be sure to list the module name in the 4691 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` 4692 variable. 4693 4694 Here is the general syntax: 4695 :: 4696 4697 module_conf_module_name = "modprobe.d-syntax" 4698 4699 You must use the kernel module name override. 4700 4701 Run ``man modprobe.d`` in the shell to find out more information on 4702 the exact syntax you want to provide with ``module_conf``. 4703 4704 Including ``module_conf`` causes the OpenEmbedded build system to 4705 populate the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` file with 4706 ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines. Here is an example that adds the options 4707 ``arg1`` and ``arg2`` to a module named ``mymodule``: 4708 :: 4709 4710 module_conf_mymodule = "options mymodule arg1=val1 arg2=val2" 4711 4712 For information on how to specify kernel modules to auto-load on 4713 boot, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable. 4714 4715 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_DEPLOY` 4716 Controls creation of the ``modules-*.tgz`` file. Set this variable to 4717 "0" to disable creation of this file, which contains all of the 4718 kernel modules resulting from a kernel build. 4719 4720 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME` 4721 The link name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in 4722 the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 4723 :: 4724 4725 MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 4726 4727 The value 4728 of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the 4729 same file, has the following value: 4730 :: 4731 4732 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 4733 4734 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional information. 4735 4736 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_NAME` 4737 The base name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in 4738 the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 4739 :: 4740 4741 MODULE_TARBALL_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 4742 4743 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable, 4744 which is set in the same file, has the following value: 4745 :: 4746 4747 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 4748 4749 :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS` 4750 Uniquely identifies the type of the target system for which packages 4751 are being built. This variable allows output for different types of 4752 target systems to be put into different subdirectories of the same 4753 output directory. 4754 4755 The default value of this variable is: 4756 :: 4757 4758 ${PACKAGE_ARCH}${TARGET_VENDOR}-${TARGET_OS} 4759 4760 Some classes (e.g. 4761 :ref:`cross-canadian <ref-classes-cross-canadian>`) modify the 4762 ``MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`` value. 4763 4764 See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. See the 4765 :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` variable for more information. 4766 4767 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` 4768 A string identifying the host distribution. Strings consist of the 4769 host distributor ID followed by the release, as reported by the 4770 ``lsb_release`` tool or as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. For 4771 example, when running a build on Ubuntu 12.10, the value is 4772 "Ubuntu-12.10". If this information is unable to be determined, the 4773 value resolves to "Unknown". 4774 4775 This variable is used by default to isolate native shared state 4776 packages for different distributions (e.g. to avoid problems with 4777 ``glibc`` version incompatibilities). Additionally, the variable is 4778 checked against 4779 :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` if that 4780 variable is set. 4781 4782 :term:`NM` 4783 The minimal command and arguments to run ``nm``. 4784 4785 :term:`NO_GENERIC_LICENSE` 4786 Avoids QA errors when you use a non-common, non-CLOSED license in a 4787 recipe. Packages exist, such as the linux-firmware package, with many 4788 licenses that are not in any way common. Also, new licenses are added 4789 occasionally to avoid introducing a lot of common license files, 4790 which are only applicable to a specific package. 4791 ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` is used to allow copying a license that does 4792 not exist in common licenses. 4793 4794 The following example shows how to add ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` to a 4795 recipe: 4796 :: 4797 4798 NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[license_name] = "license_file_in_fetched_source" 4799 4800 The following is an example that 4801 uses the ``LICENSE.Abilis.txt`` file as the license from the fetched 4802 source: 4803 :: 4804 4805 NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[Firmware-Abilis] = "LICENSE.Abilis.txt" 4806 4807 :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` 4808 Prevents installation of all "recommended-only" packages. 4809 Recommended-only packages are packages installed only through the 4810 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable). Setting the 4811 ``NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable to "1" turns this feature on: :: 4812 4813 NO_RECOMMENDATIONS = "1" 4814 4815 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 4816 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 4817 override: :: 4818 4819 NO_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "1" 4820 4821 It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages 4822 using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them 4823 (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS` 4824 variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and 4825 will install the packages to avoid dependency errors. 4826 4827 .. note:: 4828 4829 Some recommended packages might be required for certain system 4830 functionality, such as kernel modules. It is up to you to add 4831 packages with the :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable. 4832 4833 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 4834 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 4835 4836 See the :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` and 4837 the :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for 4838 related information. 4839 4840 :term:`NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG` 4841 Disables auto package from splitting ``.debug`` files. If a recipe 4842 requires ``FILES_${PN}-dbg`` to be set manually, the 4843 ``NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG`` can be defined allowing you to define the 4844 content of the debug package. For example: 4845 :: 4846 4847 NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG = "1" 4848 FILES_${PN}-dev = "${includedir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/Qt/*" 4849 FILES_${PN}-dbg = "/usr/src/debug/" 4850 FILES_${QT_BASE_NAME}-demos-doc = "${docdir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/qch/qt.qch" 4851 4852 :term:`OBJCOPY` 4853 The minimal command and arguments to run ``objcopy``. 4854 4855 :term:`OBJDUMP` 4856 The minimal command and arguments to run ``objdump``. 4857 4858 :term:`OE_BINCONFIG_EXTRA_MANGLE` 4859 When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class, 4860 this variable specifies additional arguments passed to the "sed" 4861 command. The sed command alters any paths in configuration scripts 4862 that have been set up during compilation. Inheriting this class 4863 results in all paths in these scripts being changed to point into the 4864 ``sysroots/`` directory so that all builds that use the script will 4865 use the correct directories for the cross compiling layout. 4866 4867 See the ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the 4868 :term:`Source Directory` for details on how this class 4869 applies these additional sed command arguments. For general 4870 information on the ``binconfig`` class, see the 4871 ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section. 4872 4873 :term:`OE_IMPORTS` 4874 An internal variable used to tell the OpenEmbedded build system what 4875 Python modules to import for every Python function run by the system. 4876 4877 .. note:: 4878 4879 Do not set this variable. It is for internal use only. 4880 4881 :term:`OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT` 4882 The name of the build environment setup script for the purposes of 4883 setting up the environment within the extensible SDK. The default 4884 value is "oe-init-build-env". 4885 4886 If you use a custom script to set up your build environment, set the 4887 ``OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT`` variable to its name. 4888 4889 :term:`OE_TERMINAL` 4890 Controls how the OpenEmbedded build system spawns interactive 4891 terminals on the host development system (e.g. using the BitBake 4892 command with the ``-c devshell`` command-line option). For more 4893 information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using a development shell`" section in 4894 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4895 4896 You can use the following values for the ``OE_TERMINAL`` variable: 4897 4898 - auto 4899 - gnome 4900 - xfce 4901 - rxvt 4902 - screen 4903 - konsole 4904 - none 4905 4906 :term:`OEROOT` 4907 The directory from which the top-level build environment setup script 4908 is sourced. The Yocto Project provides a top-level build environment 4909 setup script: :ref:`structure-core-script`. When you run this 4910 script, the ``OEROOT`` variable resolves to the directory that 4911 contains the script. 4912 4913 For additional information on how this variable is used, see the 4914 initialization script. 4915 4916 :term:`OLDEST_KERNEL` 4917 Declares the oldest version of the Linux kernel that the produced 4918 binaries must support. This variable is passed into the build of the 4919 Embedded GNU C Library (``glibc``). 4920 4921 The default for this variable comes from the 4922 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. You can override this 4923 default by setting the variable in a custom distribution 4924 configuration file. 4925 4926 :term:`OVERRIDES` 4927 A colon-separated list of overrides that currently apply. Overrides 4928 are a BitBake mechanism that allows variables to be selectively 4929 overridden at the end of parsing. The set of overrides in 4930 ``OVERRIDES`` represents the "state" during building, which includes 4931 the current recipe being built, the machine for which it is being 4932 built, and so forth. 4933 4934 As an example, if the string "an-override" appears as an element in 4935 the colon-separated list in ``OVERRIDES``, then the following 4936 assignment will override ``FOO`` with the value "overridden" at the 4937 end of parsing: 4938 :: 4939 4940 FOO_an-override = "overridden" 4941 4942 See the 4943 ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`" 4944 section in the BitBake User Manual for more information on the 4945 overrides mechanism. 4946 4947 The default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes the values of the 4948 :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE`, 4949 :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`, and 4950 :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` variables. Another 4951 important override included by default is ``pn-${PN}``. This override 4952 allows variables to be set for a single recipe within configuration 4953 (``.conf``) files. Here is an example: 4954 :: 4955 4956 FOO_pn-myrecipe = "myrecipe-specific value" 4957 4958 .. note:: 4959 4960 An easy way to see what overrides apply is to search for ``OVERRIDES`` 4961 in the output of the ``bitbake -e`` command. See the 4962 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing variable values`" section in the Yocto 4963 Project Development Tasks Manual for more information. 4964 4965 :term:`P` 4966 The recipe name and version. ``P`` is comprised of the following: 4967 :: 4968 4969 ${PN}-${PV} 4970 4971 :term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA` 4972 This variable defines additional metdata to add to packages. 4973 4974 You may find you need to inject additional metadata into packages. 4975 This variable allows you to do that by setting the injected data as 4976 the value. Multiple fields can be added by splitting the content with 4977 the literal separator "\n". 4978 4979 The suffixes '_IPK', '_DEB', or '_RPM' can be applied to the variable 4980 to do package type specific settings. It can also be made package 4981 specific by using the package name as a suffix. 4982 4983 You can find out more about applying this variable in the 4984 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding custom metadata to packages`" 4985 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4986 4987 :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` 4988 The architecture of the resulting package or packages. 4989 4990 By default, the value of this variable is set to 4991 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` when building for the 4992 target, :term:`BUILD_ARCH` when building for the 4993 build host, and "${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}" when building for the 4994 SDK. 4995 4996 .. note:: 4997 4998 See :term:`SDK_ARCH` for more information. 4999 5000 However, if your recipe's output packages are built specific to the 5001 target machine rather than generally for the architecture of the 5002 machine, you should set ``PACKAGE_ARCH`` to the value of 5003 :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` in the recipe as follows: 5004 :: 5005 5006 PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}" 5007 5008 :term:`PACKAGE_ARCHS` 5009 Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the target machine. 5010 This variable is set automatically and should not normally be 5011 hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order 5012 of priority. The default value for ``PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any 5013 noarch ${PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS} ${MACHINE_ARCH}". 5014 5015 :term:`PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN` 5016 Enables easily adding packages to ``PACKAGES`` before ``${PN}`` so 5017 that those added packages can pick up files that would normally be 5018 included in the default package. 5019 5020 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` 5021 This variable, which is set in the ``local.conf`` configuration file 5022 found in the ``conf`` folder of the 5023 :term:`Build Directory`, specifies the package manager the 5024 OpenEmbedded build system uses when packaging data. 5025 5026 You can provide one or more of the following arguments for the 5027 variable: PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_rpm package_deb package_ipk 5028 package_tar" 5029 5030 .. note:: 5031 5032 While it is a legal option, the ``package_tar`` 5033 class has limited functionality due to no support for package 5034 dependencies by that backend. Therefore, it is recommended that 5035 you do not use it. 5036 5037 The build system uses only the first argument in the list as the 5038 package manager when creating your image or SDK. However, packages 5039 will be created using any additional packaging classes you specify. 5040 For example, if you use the following in your ``local.conf`` file: 5041 :: 5042 5043 PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_ipk" 5044 5045 The OpenEmbedded build system uses 5046 the IPK package manager to create your image or SDK. 5047 5048 For information on packaging and build performance effects as a 5049 result of the package manager in use, see the 5050 ":ref:`package.bbclass <ref-classes-package>`" section. 5051 5052 :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE` 5053 Determines how to split up the binary and debug information when 5054 creating ``*-dbg`` packages to be used with the GNU Project Debugger 5055 (GDB). 5056 5057 With the ``PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`` variable, you can control 5058 where debug information, which can include or exclude source files, 5059 is stored: 5060 5061 - ".debug": Debug symbol files are placed next to the binary in a 5062 ``.debug`` directory on the target. For example, if a binary is 5063 installed into ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbol files are 5064 installed in ``/bin/.debug``. Source files are placed in 5065 ``/usr/src/debug``. 5066 5067 - "debug-file-directory": Debug symbol files are placed under 5068 ``/usr/lib/debug`` on the target, and separated by the path from 5069 where the binary is installed. For example, if a binary is 5070 installed in ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbols are 5071 installed in ``/usr/lib/debug/bin``. Source files are placed in 5072 ``/usr/src/debug``. 5073 5074 - "debug-without-src": The same behavior as ".debug" previously 5075 described with the exception that no source files are installed. 5076 5077 - "debug-with-srcpkg": The same behavior as ".debug" previously 5078 described with the exception that all source files are placed in a 5079 separate ``*-src`` pkg. This is the default behavior. 5080 5081 You can find out more about debugging using GDB by reading the 5082 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging with the gnu project debugger (gdb) remotely`" section 5083 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5084 5085 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY` 5086 Prevents specific packages from being installed when you are 5087 installing complementary packages. 5088 5089 You might find that you want to prevent installing certain packages 5090 when you are installing complementary packages. For example, if you 5091 are using :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` to install 5092 ``dev-pkgs``, you might not want to install all packages from a 5093 particular multilib. If you find yourself in this situation, you can 5094 use the ``PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY`` variable to specify regular 5095 expressions to match the packages you want to exclude. 5096 5097 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` 5098 Lists packages that should not be installed into an image. For 5099 example: 5100 :: 5101 5102 PACKAGE_EXCLUDE = "package_name package_name package_name ..." 5103 5104 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 5105 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 5106 override: 5107 :: 5108 5109 PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_pn-target_image = "package_name" 5110 5111 If you choose to not install a package using this variable and some 5112 other package is dependent on it (i.e. listed in a recipe's 5113 :term:`RDEPENDS` variable), the OpenEmbedded build 5114 system generates a fatal installation error. Because the build system 5115 halts the process with a fatal error, you can use the variable with 5116 an iterative development process to remove specific components from a 5117 system. 5118 5119 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 5120 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 5121 5122 See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the 5123 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` variables for 5124 related information. 5125 5126 :term:`PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS` 5127 Specifies the list of architectures compatible with the device CPU. 5128 This variable is useful when you build for several different devices 5129 that use miscellaneous processors such as XScale and ARM926-EJS. 5130 5131 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` 5132 Optionally specifies the package architectures used as part of the 5133 package feed URIs during the build. When used, the 5134 ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variable is appended to the final package feed 5135 URI, which is constructed using the 5136 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` and 5137 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS` 5138 variables. 5139 5140 .. note:: 5141 5142 You can use the ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` 5143 variable to whitelist specific package architectures. If you do 5144 not need to whitelist specific architectures, which is a common 5145 case, you can omit this variable. Omitting the variable results in 5146 all available architectures for the current machine being included 5147 into remote package feeds. 5148 5149 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5150 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5151 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5152 :: 5153 5154 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5155 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5156 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5157 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5158 5159 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5160 5161 .. code-block:: none 5162 5163 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5164 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5165 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5166 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5167 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5168 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5169 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5170 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5171 5172 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS` 5173 Specifies the base path used when constructing package feed URIs. The 5174 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`` variable makes up the middle portion of a 5175 package feed URI used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The base path 5176 lies between the :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` 5177 and :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables. 5178 5179 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5180 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5181 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5182 :: 5183 5184 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5185 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5186 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5187 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5188 5189 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5190 5191 .. code-block:: none 5192 5193 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5194 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5195 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5196 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5197 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5198 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5199 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5200 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5201 5202 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` 5203 Specifies the front portion of the package feed URI used by the 5204 OpenEmbedded build system. Each final package feed URI is comprised 5205 of ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5206 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`, and 5207 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables. 5208 5209 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5210 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5211 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5212 :: 5213 5214 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5215 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5216 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5217 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5218 5219 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5220 5221 .. code-block:: none 5222 5223 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5224 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5225 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5226 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5227 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5228 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5229 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5230 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5231 5232 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` 5233 The final list of packages passed to the package manager for 5234 installation into the image. 5235 5236 Because the package manager controls actual installation of all 5237 packages, the list of packages passed using ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` is 5238 not the final list of packages that are actually installed. This 5239 variable is internal to the image construction code. Consequently, in 5240 general, you should use the 5241 :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable to specify 5242 packages for installation. The exception to this is when working with 5243 the :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>` 5244 image. When working with an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) image, 5245 use the ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` variable. For information on creating an 5246 initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 5247 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5248 5249 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL_ATTEMPTONLY` 5250 Specifies a list of packages the OpenEmbedded build system attempts 5251 to install when creating an image. If a listed package fails to 5252 install, the build system does not generate an error. This variable 5253 is generally not user-defined. 5254 5255 :term:`PACKAGE_PREPROCESS_FUNCS` 5256 Specifies a list of functions run to pre-process the 5257 :term:`PKGD` directory prior to splitting the files out 5258 to individual packages. 5259 5260 :term:`PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS` 5261 Specifies a list of dependencies for post-installation and 5262 pre-installation scripts on native/cross tools. If your 5263 post-installation or pre-installation script can execute at rootfs 5264 creation time rather than on the target but depends on a native tool 5265 in order to execute, you need to list the tools in 5266 ``PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS``. 5267 5268 For information on running post-installation scripts, see the 5269 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:post-installation scripts`" 5270 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5271 5272 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` 5273 This variable provides a means of enabling or disabling features of a 5274 recipe on a per-recipe basis. ``PACKAGECONFIG`` blocks are defined in 5275 recipes when you specify features and then arguments that define 5276 feature behaviors. Here is the basic block structure (broken over 5277 multiple lines for readability): 5278 :: 5279 5280 PACKAGECONFIG ??= "f1 f2 f3 ..." 5281 PACKAGECONFIG[f1] = "\ 5282 --with-f1, \ 5283 --without-f1, \ 5284 build-deps-for-f1, \ 5285 runtime-deps-for-f1, \ 5286 runtime-recommends-for-f1, \ 5287 packageconfig-conflicts-for-f1" 5288 PACKAGECONFIG[f2] = "\ 5289 ... and so on and so on ... 5290 5291 The ``PACKAGECONFIG`` variable itself specifies a space-separated 5292 list of the features to enable. Following the features, you can 5293 determine the behavior of each feature by providing up to six 5294 order-dependent arguments, which are separated by commas. You can 5295 omit any argument you like but must retain the separating commas. The 5296 order is important and specifies the following: 5297 5298 1. Extra arguments that should be added to the configure script 5299 argument list (:term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or 5300 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`) if 5301 the feature is enabled. 5302 5303 2. Extra arguments that should be added to ``EXTRA_OECONF`` or 5304 ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` if the feature is disabled. 5305 5306 3. Additional build dependencies (:term:`DEPENDS`) 5307 that should be added if the feature is enabled. 5308 5309 4. Additional runtime dependencies (:term:`RDEPENDS`) 5310 that should be added if the feature is enabled. 5311 5312 5. Additional runtime recommendations 5313 (:term:`RRECOMMENDS`) that should be added if 5314 the feature is enabled. 5315 5316 6. Any conflicting (that is, mutually exclusive) ``PACKAGECONFIG`` 5317 settings for this feature. 5318 5319 Consider the following ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block taken from the 5320 ``librsvg`` recipe. In this example the feature is ``gtk``, which has 5321 three arguments that determine the feature's behavior. 5322 :: 5323 5324 PACKAGECONFIG[gtk] = "--with-gtk3,--without-gtk3,gtk+3" 5325 5326 The 5327 ``--with-gtk3`` and ``gtk+3`` arguments apply only if the feature is 5328 enabled. In this case, ``--with-gtk3`` is added to the configure 5329 script argument list and ``gtk+3`` is added to ``DEPENDS``. On the 5330 other hand, if the feature is disabled say through a ``.bbappend`` 5331 file in another layer, then the second argument ``--without-gtk3`` is 5332 added to the configure script instead. 5333 5334 The basic ``PACKAGECONFIG`` structure previously described holds true 5335 regardless of whether you are creating a block or changing a block. 5336 When creating a block, use the structure inside your recipe. 5337 5338 If you want to change an existing ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block, you can do 5339 so one of two ways: 5340 5341 - *Append file:* Create an append file named 5342 recipename\ ``.bbappend`` in your layer and override the value of 5343 ``PACKAGECONFIG``. You can either completely override the 5344 variable: 5345 :: 5346 5347 PACKAGECONFIG = "f4 f5" 5348 5349 Or, you can just append the variable: 5350 :: 5351 5352 PACKAGECONFIG_append = " f4" 5353 5354 - *Configuration file:* This method is identical to changing the 5355 block through an append file except you edit your ``local.conf`` 5356 or ``mydistro.conf`` file. As with append files previously 5357 described, you can either completely override the variable: 5358 :: 5359 5360 PACKAGECONFIG_pn-recipename = "f4 f5" 5361 5362 Or, you can just amend the variable: 5363 :: 5364 5365 PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-recipename = " f4" 5366 5367 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` 5368 A space-separated list of configuration options generated from the 5369 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` setting. 5370 5371 Classes such as :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` and 5372 :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` use ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` to 5373 pass ``PACKAGECONFIG`` options to ``configure`` and ``cmake``, 5374 respectively. If you are using ``PACKAGECONFIG`` but not a class that 5375 handles the ``do_configure`` task, then you need to use 5376 ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` appropriately. 5377 5378 :term:`PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY` 5379 For recipes inheriting the 5380 :ref:`packagegroup <ref-classes-packagegroup>` class, setting 5381 ``PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY`` to "1" specifies that the 5382 normal complementary packages (i.e. ``-dev``, ``-dbg``, and so forth) 5383 should not be automatically created by the ``packagegroup`` recipe, 5384 which is the default behavior. 5385 5386 :term:`PACKAGES` 5387 The list of packages the recipe creates. The default value is the 5388 following: 5389 :: 5390 5391 ${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN} 5392 5393 During packaging, the :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task 5394 goes through ``PACKAGES`` and uses the :term:`FILES` 5395 variable corresponding to each package to assign files to the 5396 package. If a file matches the ``FILES`` variable for more than one 5397 package in ``PACKAGES``, it will be assigned to the earliest 5398 (leftmost) package. 5399 5400 Packages in the variable's list that are empty (i.e. where none of 5401 the patterns in ``FILES_``\ pkg match any files installed by the 5402 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task) are not generated, 5403 unless generation is forced through the 5404 :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` variable. 5405 5406 :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` 5407 A promise that your recipe satisfies runtime dependencies for 5408 optional modules that are found in other recipes. 5409 ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` does not actually satisfy the dependencies, it 5410 only states that they should be satisfied. For example, if a hard, 5411 runtime dependency (:term:`RDEPENDS`) of another 5412 package is satisfied at build time through the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` 5413 variable, but a package with the module name is never actually 5414 produced, then the other package will be broken. Thus, if you attempt 5415 to include that package in an image, you will get a dependency 5416 failure from the packaging system during the 5417 :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task. 5418 5419 Typically, if there is a chance that such a situation can occur and 5420 the package that is not created is valid without the dependency being 5421 satisfied, then you should use :term:`RRECOMMENDS` 5422 (a soft runtime dependency) instead of ``RDEPENDS``. 5423 5424 For an example of how to use the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` variable when 5425 you are splitting packages, see the 5426 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:handling optional module packaging`" 5427 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5428 5429 :term:`PACKAGESPLITFUNCS` 5430 Specifies a list of functions run to perform additional splitting of 5431 files into individual packages. Recipes can either prepend to this 5432 variable or prepend to the ``populate_packages`` function in order to 5433 perform additional package splitting. In either case, the function 5434 should set :term:`PACKAGES`, 5435 :term:`FILES`, :term:`RDEPENDS` and 5436 other packaging variables appropriately in order to perform the 5437 desired splitting. 5438 5439 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` 5440 Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the 5441 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task in order to specify 5442 parallel compilation on the local build host. This variable is 5443 usually in the form "-j x", where x represents the maximum number of 5444 parallel threads ``make`` can run. 5445 5446 .. note:: 5447 5448 In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` to be effective, ``make`` must be 5449 called with ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy way to ensure 5450 this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function. 5451 5452 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this 5453 variable to be equal to the number of cores the build system uses. 5454 5455 .. note:: 5456 5457 If the software being built experiences dependency issues during 5458 the ``do_compile`` task that result in race conditions, you can clear 5459 the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable within the recipe as a workaround. For 5460 information on addressing race conditions, see the 5461 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`" 5462 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5463 5464 For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to 5465 override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds. 5466 However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical 5467 CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable is 5468 not set higher than "-j 20". 5469 5470 For more information on speeding up builds, see the 5471 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`" 5472 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5473 5474 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` 5475 Extra options passed to the ``make install`` command during the 5476 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task in order to specify 5477 parallel installation. This variable defaults to the value of 5478 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`. 5479 5480 .. note:: 5481 5482 In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` to be effective, ``make`` must 5483 be called with 5484 ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy 5485 way to ensure this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function. 5486 5487 If the software being built experiences dependency issues during 5488 the ``do_install`` task that result in race conditions, you can 5489 clear the ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` variable within the recipe as a 5490 workaround. For information on addressing race conditions, see the 5491 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`" 5492 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5493 5494 :term:`PATCHRESOLVE` 5495 Determines the action to take when a patch fails. You can set this 5496 variable to one of two values: "noop" and "user". 5497 5498 The default value of "noop" causes the build to simply fail when the 5499 OpenEmbedded build system cannot successfully apply a patch. Setting 5500 the value to "user" causes the build system to launch a shell and 5501 places you in the right location so that you can manually resolve the 5502 conflicts. 5503 5504 Set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 5505 5506 :term:`PATCHTOOL` 5507 Specifies the utility used to apply patches for a recipe during the 5508 :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task. You can specify one of 5509 three utilities: "patch", "quilt", or "git". The default utility used 5510 is "quilt" except for the quilt-native recipe itself. Because the 5511 quilt tool is not available at the time quilt-native is being 5512 patched, it uses "patch". 5513 5514 If you wish to use an alternative patching tool, set the variable in 5515 the recipe using one of the following: 5516 :: 5517 5518 PATCHTOOL = "patch" 5519 PATCHTOOL = "quilt" 5520 PATCHTOOL = "git" 5521 5522 :term:`PE` 5523 The epoch of the recipe. By default, this variable is unset. The 5524 variable is used to make upgrades possible when the versioning scheme 5525 changes in some backwards incompatible way. 5526 5527 ``PE`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGE` variable. 5528 5529 :term:`PF` 5530 Specifies the recipe or package name and includes all version and 5531 revision numbers (i.e. ``glibc-2.13-r20+svnr15508/`` and 5532 ``bash-4.2-r1/``). This variable is comprised of the following: 5533 ${:term:`PN`}-${:term:`EXTENDPE`}${:term:`PV`}-${:term:`PR`} 5534 5535 :term:`PIXBUF_PACKAGES` 5536 When inheriting the :ref:`pixbufcache <ref-classes-pixbufcache>` 5537 class, this variable identifies packages that contain the pixbuf 5538 loaders used with ``gdk-pixbuf``. By default, the ``pixbufcache`` 5539 class assumes that the loaders are in the recipe's main package (i.e. 5540 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if the 5541 loaders you need are in a package other than that main package. 5542 5543 :term:`PKG` 5544 The name of the resulting package created by the OpenEmbedded build 5545 system. 5546 5547 .. note:: 5548 5549 When using the ``PKG`` variable, you must use a package name override. 5550 5551 For example, when the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class 5552 renames the output package, it does so by setting 5553 ``PKG_packagename``. 5554 5555 :term:`PKG_CONFIG_PATH` 5556 The path to ``pkg-config`` files for the current build context. 5557 ``pkg-config`` reads this variable from the environment. 5558 5559 :term:`PKGD` 5560 Points to the destination directory for files to be packaged before 5561 they are split into individual packages. This directory defaults to 5562 the following: 5563 :: 5564 5565 ${WORKDIR}/package 5566 5567 Do not change this default. 5568 5569 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` 5570 Points to a shared, global-state directory that holds data generated 5571 during the packaging process. During the packaging process, the 5572 :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task packages data 5573 for each recipe and installs it into this temporary, shared area. 5574 This directory defaults to the following, which you should not 5575 change: 5576 :: 5577 5578 ${STAGING_DIR_HOST}/pkgdata 5579 5580 For examples of how this data is used, see the 5581 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 5582 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the 5583 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing package information with \`\`oe-pkgdata-util\`\``" 5584 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For more 5585 information on the shared, global-state directory, see 5586 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`. 5587 5588 :term:`PKGDEST` 5589 Points to the parent directory for files to be packaged after they 5590 have been split into individual packages. This directory defaults to 5591 the following: 5592 :: 5593 5594 ${WORKDIR}/packages-split 5595 5596 Under this directory, the build system creates directories for each 5597 package specified in :term:`PACKAGES`. Do not change 5598 this default. 5599 5600 :term:`PKGDESTWORK` 5601 Points to a temporary work area where the 5602 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task saves package metadata. 5603 The ``PKGDESTWORK`` location defaults to the following: 5604 :: 5605 5606 ${WORKDIR}/pkgdata 5607 5608 Do not change this default. 5609 5610 The :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task copies the 5611 package metadata from ``PKGDESTWORK`` to 5612 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` to make it available globally. 5613 5614 :term:`PKGE` 5615 The epoch of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, ``PKGE`` 5616 is set to :term:`PE`. 5617 5618 :term:`PKGR` 5619 The revision of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, 5620 ``PKGR`` is set to :term:`PR`. 5621 5622 :term:`PKGV` 5623 The version of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, 5624 ``PKGV`` is set to :term:`PV`. 5625 5626 :term:`PN` 5627 This variable can have two separate functions depending on the 5628 context: a recipe name or a resulting package name. 5629 5630 ``PN`` refers to a recipe name in the context of a file used by the 5631 OpenEmbedded build system as input to create a package. The name is 5632 normally extracted from the recipe file name. For example, if the 5633 recipe is named ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PN`` 5634 will be "expat". 5635 5636 The variable refers to a package name in the context of a file 5637 created or produced by the OpenEmbedded build system. 5638 5639 If applicable, the ``PN`` variable also contains any special suffix 5640 or prefix. For example, using ``bash`` to build packages for the 5641 native machine, ``PN`` is ``bash-native``. Using ``bash`` to build 5642 packages for the target and for Multilib, ``PN`` would be ``bash`` 5643 and ``lib64-bash``, respectively. 5644 5645 :term:`PNBLACKLIST` 5646 Lists recipes you do not want the OpenEmbedded build system to build. 5647 This variable works in conjunction with the 5648 :ref:`blacklist <ref-classes-blacklist>` class, which is inherited 5649 globally. 5650 5651 To prevent a recipe from being built, use the ``PNBLACKLIST`` 5652 variable in your ``local.conf`` file. Here is an example that 5653 prevents ``myrecipe`` from being built: 5654 :: 5655 5656 PNBLACKLIST[myrecipe] = "Not supported by our organization." 5657 5658 :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND` 5659 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 5660 system has created the host part of the SDK. You can specify 5661 functions separated by semicolons: 5662 :: 5663 5664 POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND += "function; ... " 5665 5666 If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you 5667 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 5668 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 5669 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 5670 5671 :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND` 5672 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 5673 system has created the target part of the SDK. You can specify 5674 functions separated by semicolons: 5675 :: 5676 5677 POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND += "function; ... " 5678 5679 If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you 5680 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 5681 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 5682 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 5683 5684 :term:`PR` 5685 The revision of the recipe. The default value for this variable is 5686 "r0". Subsequent revisions of the recipe conventionally have the 5687 values "r1", "r2", and so forth. When :term:`PV` increases, 5688 ``PR`` is conventionally reset to "r0". 5689 5690 .. note:: 5691 5692 The OpenEmbedded build system does not need the aid of ``PR`` 5693 to know when to rebuild a recipe. The build system uses the task 5694 :ref:`input checksums <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>` along with the 5695 :ref:`stamp <structure-build-tmp-stamps>` and 5696 :ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache` 5697 mechanisms. 5698 5699 The ``PR`` variable primarily becomes significant when a package 5700 manager dynamically installs packages on an already built image. In 5701 this case, ``PR``, which is the default value of 5702 :term:`PKGR`, helps the package manager distinguish which 5703 package is the most recent one in cases where many packages have the 5704 same ``PV`` (i.e. ``PKGV``). A component having many packages with 5705 the same ``PV`` usually means that the packages all install the same 5706 upstream version, but with later (``PR``) version packages including 5707 packaging fixes. 5708 5709 .. note:: 5710 5711 ``PR`` does not need to be increased for changes that do not change the 5712 package contents or metadata. 5713 5714 Because manually managing ``PR`` can be cumbersome and error-prone, 5715 an automated solution exists. See the 5716 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service`" section 5717 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more information. 5718 5719 :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` 5720 If multiple recipes provide the same item, this variable determines 5721 which recipe is preferred and thus provides the item (i.e. the 5722 preferred provider). You should always suffix this variable with the 5723 name of the provided item. And, you should define the variable using 5724 the preferred recipe's name (:term:`PN`). Here is a common 5725 example: 5726 :: 5727 5728 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ?= "linux-yocto" 5729 5730 In the previous example, multiple recipes are providing "virtual/kernel". 5731 The ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` variable is set with the name (``PN``) of 5732 the recipe you prefer to provide "virtual/kernel". 5733 5734 Following are more examples: 5735 :: 5736 5737 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/xserver = "xserver-xf86" 5738 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/libgl ?= "mesa" 5739 5740 For more 5741 information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using virtual providers`" 5742 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5743 5744 .. note:: 5745 5746 If you use a ``virtual/\*`` item with ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER``, then any 5747 recipe that :term:`PROVIDES` that item but is not selected (defined) 5748 by ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` is prevented from building, which is usually 5749 desirable since this mechanism is designed to select between mutually 5750 exclusive alternative providers. 5751 5752 :term:`PREFERRED_VERSION` 5753 If multiple versions of recipes exist, this variable determines which 5754 version is given preference. You must always suffix the variable with 5755 the :term:`PN` you want to select, and you should set the 5756 :term:`PV` accordingly for precedence. 5757 5758 The ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable supports limited wildcard use 5759 through the "``%``" character. You can use the character to match any 5760 number of characters, which can be useful when specifying versions 5761 that contain long revision numbers that potentially change. Here are 5762 two examples: 5763 :: 5764 5765 PREFERRED_VERSION_python = "3.4.0" 5766 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto = "5.0%" 5767 5768 .. note:: 5769 5770 The use of the "%" character is limited in that it only works at the end of the 5771 string. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other 5772 location of the string. 5773 5774 The specified version is matched against :term:`PV`, which 5775 does not necessarily match the version part of the recipe's filename. 5776 For example, consider two recipes ``foo_1.2.bb`` and ``foo_git.bb`` 5777 where ``foo_git.bb`` contains the following assignment: 5778 :: 5779 5780 PV = "1.1+git${SRCPV}" 5781 5782 In this case, the correct way to select 5783 ``foo_git.bb`` is by using an assignment such as the following: 5784 :: 5785 5786 PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "1.1+git%" 5787 5788 Compare that previous example 5789 against the following incorrect example, which does not work: 5790 :: 5791 5792 PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "git" 5793 5794 Sometimes the ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable can be set by 5795 configuration files in a way that is hard to change. You can use 5796 :term:`OVERRIDES` to set a machine-specific 5797 override. Here is an example: 5798 :: 5799 5800 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_qemux86 = "5.0%" 5801 5802 Although not recommended, worst case, you can also use the 5803 "forcevariable" override, which is the strongest override possible. 5804 Here is an example: 5805 :: 5806 5807 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_forcevariable = "5.0%" 5808 5809 .. note:: 5810 5811 The ``\_forcevariable`` override is not handled specially. This override 5812 only works because the default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes "forcevariable". 5813 5814 :term:`PREMIRRORS` 5815 Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system 5816 gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it 5817 first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the 5818 build system tries locations defined by ``PREMIRRORS``, the upstream 5819 source, and then locations specified by 5820 :term:`MIRRORS` in that order. 5821 5822 Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky", 5823 the default value for ``PREMIRRORS`` is defined in the 5824 ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository. 5825 5826 Typically, you could add a specific server for the build system to 5827 attempt before any others by adding something like the following to 5828 the ``local.conf`` configuration file in the 5829 :term:`Build Directory`: 5830 :: 5831 5832 PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\ 5833 git://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5834 ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5835 http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5836 https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n" 5837 5838 These changes cause the 5839 build system to intercept Git, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS requests and 5840 direct them to the ``http://`` sources mirror. You can use 5841 ``file://`` URLs to point to local directories or network shares as 5842 well. 5843 5844 :term:`PRIORITY` 5845 Indicates the importance of a package. 5846 5847 ``PRIORITY`` is considered to be part of the distribution policy 5848 because the importance of any given recipe depends on the purpose for 5849 which the distribution is being produced. Thus, ``PRIORITY`` is not 5850 normally set within recipes. 5851 5852 You can set ``PRIORITY`` to "required", "standard", "extra", and 5853 "optional", which is the default. 5854 5855 :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` 5856 Specifies libraries installed within a recipe that should be ignored 5857 by the OpenEmbedded build system's shared library resolver. This 5858 variable is typically used when software being built by a recipe has 5859 its own private versions of a library normally provided by another 5860 recipe. In this case, you would not want the package containing the 5861 private libraries to be set as a dependency on other unrelated 5862 packages that should instead depend on the package providing the 5863 standard version of the library. 5864 5865 Libraries specified in this variable should be specified by their 5866 file name. For example, from the Firefox recipe in meta-browser: 5867 :: 5868 5869 PRIVATE_LIBS = "libmozjs.so \ 5870 libxpcom.so \ 5871 libnspr4.so \ 5872 libxul.so \ 5873 libmozalloc.so \ 5874 libplc4.so \ 5875 libplds4.so" 5876 5877 For more information, see the 5878 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 5879 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 5880 5881 :term:`PROVIDES` 5882 A list of aliases by which a particular recipe can be known. By 5883 default, a recipe's own ``PN`` is implicitly already in its 5884 ``PROVIDES`` list and therefore does not need to mention that it 5885 provides itself. If a recipe uses ``PROVIDES``, the additional 5886 aliases are synonyms for the recipe and can be useful for satisfying 5887 dependencies of other recipes during the build as specified by 5888 ``DEPENDS``. 5889 5890 Consider the following example ``PROVIDES`` statement from the recipe 5891 file ``eudev_3.2.9.bb``: 5892 :: 5893 5894 PROVIDES = "udev" 5895 5896 The ``PROVIDES`` statement 5897 results in the "eudev" recipe also being available as simply "udev". 5898 5899 .. note:: 5900 5901 Given that a recipe's own recipe name is already implicitly in its 5902 own PROVIDES list, it is unnecessary to add aliases with the "+=" operator; 5903 using a simple assignment will be sufficient. In other words, 5904 while you could write: 5905 :: 5906 5907 PROVIDES += "udev" 5908 5909 5910 in the above, the "+=" is overkill and unnecessary. 5911 5912 In addition to providing recipes under alternate names, the 5913 ``PROVIDES`` mechanism is also used to implement virtual targets. A 5914 virtual target is a name that corresponds to some particular 5915 functionality (e.g. a Linux kernel). Recipes that provide the 5916 functionality in question list the virtual target in ``PROVIDES``. 5917 Recipes that depend on the functionality in question can include the 5918 virtual target in ``DEPENDS`` to leave the choice of provider open. 5919 5920 Conventionally, virtual targets have names on the form 5921 "virtual/function" (e.g. "virtual/kernel"). The slash is simply part 5922 of the name and has no syntactical significance. 5923 5924 The :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable is 5925 used to select which particular recipe provides a virtual target. 5926 5927 .. note:: 5928 5929 A corresponding mechanism for virtual runtime dependencies 5930 (packages) exists. However, the mechanism does not depend on any 5931 special functionality beyond ordinary variable assignments. For 5932 example, ``VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager`` refers to the package of 5933 the component that manages the ``/dev`` directory. 5934 5935 Setting the "preferred provider" for runtime dependencies is as 5936 simple as using the following assignment in a configuration file: 5937 :: 5938 5939 VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev" 5940 5941 5942 :term:`PRSERV_HOST` 5943 The network based :term:`PR` service host and port. 5944 5945 The ``conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in the 5946 :term:`Source Directory` shows how the 5947 ``PRSERV_HOST`` variable is set: 5948 :: 5949 5950 PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0" 5951 5952 You must 5953 set the variable if you want to automatically start a local :ref:`PR 5954 service <dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service>`. You can 5955 set ``PRSERV_HOST`` to other values to use a remote PR service. 5956 5957 5958 :term:`PSEUDO_IGNORE_PATHS` 5959 A comma-separated (without spaces) list of path prefixes that should be ignored 5960 by pseudo when monitoring and recording file operations, in order to avoid 5961 problems with files being written to outside of the pseudo context and 5962 reduce pseudo's overhead. A path is ignored if it matches any prefix in the list 5963 and can include partial directory (or file) names. 5964 5965 5966 :term:`PTEST_ENABLED` 5967 Specifies whether or not :ref:`Package 5968 Test <dev-manual/common-tasks:testing packages with ptest>` (ptest) 5969 functionality is enabled when building a recipe. You should not set 5970 this variable directly. Enabling and disabling building Package Tests 5971 at build time should be done by adding "ptest" to (or removing it 5972 from) :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. 5973 5974 :term:`PV` 5975 The version of the recipe. The version is normally extracted from the 5976 recipe filename. For example, if the recipe is named 5977 ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PV`` will be "2.0.1". 5978 ``PV`` is generally not overridden within a recipe unless it is 5979 building an unstable (i.e. development) version from a source code 5980 repository (e.g. Git or Subversion). 5981 5982 ``PV`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGV` variable. 5983 5984 :term:`PYTHON_ABI` 5985 When used by recipes that inherit the 5986 :ref:`distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`, 5987 :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`, 5988 :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or 5989 :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, denotes the 5990 Application Binary Interface (ABI) currently in use for Python. By 5991 default, the ABI is "m". You do not have to set this variable as the 5992 OpenEmbedded build system sets it for you. 5993 5994 The OpenEmbedded build system uses the ABI to construct directory 5995 names used when installing the Python headers and libraries in 5996 sysroot (e.g. ``.../python3.3m/...``). 5997 5998 Recipes that inherit the ``distutils`` class during cross-builds also 5999 use this variable to locate the headers and libraries of the 6000 appropriate Python that the extension is targeting. 6001 6002 :term:`PYTHON_PN` 6003 When used by recipes that inherit the 6004 `distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`, 6005 :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`, 6006 :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or 6007 :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, specifies the 6008 major Python version being built. For Python 3.x, ``PYTHON_PN`` would 6009 be "python3". You do not have to set this variable as the 6010 OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets it for you. 6011 6012 The variable allows recipes to use common infrastructure such as the 6013 following: 6014 :: 6015 6016 DEPENDS += "${PYTHON_PN}-native" 6017 6018 In the previous example, 6019 the version of the dependency is ``PYTHON_PN``. 6020 6021 :term:`RANLIB` 6022 The minimal command and arguments to run ``ranlib``. 6023 6024 :term:`RCONFLICTS` 6025 The list of packages that conflict with packages. Note that packages 6026 will not be installed if conflicting packages are not first removed. 6027 6028 Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in 6029 conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example: 6030 :: 6031 6032 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "another_conflicting_package_name" 6033 6034 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6035 specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies 6036 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6037 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6038 ``RCONFLICTS`` variable: 6039 :: 6040 6041 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6042 6043 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6044 6045 - = 6046 - < 6047 - > 6048 - <= 6049 - >= 6050 6051 For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or 6052 greater of the package ``foo``: 6053 :: 6054 6055 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6056 6057 :term:`RDEPENDS` 6058 Lists runtime dependencies of a package. These dependencies are other 6059 packages that must be installed in order for the package to function 6060 correctly. As an example, the following assignment declares that the 6061 package ``foo`` needs the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` to be 6062 installed: 6063 :: 6064 6065 RDEPENDS_foo = "bar baz" 6066 6067 The most common types of package 6068 runtime dependencies are automatically detected and added. Therefore, 6069 most recipes do not need to set ``RDEPENDS``. For more information, 6070 see the 6071 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 6072 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 6073 6074 The practical effect of the above ``RDEPENDS`` assignment is that 6075 ``bar`` and ``baz`` will be declared as dependencies inside the 6076 package ``foo`` when it is written out by one of the 6077 :ref:`do_package_write_\* <ref-tasks-package_write_deb>` tasks. 6078 Exactly how this is done depends on which package format is used, 6079 which is determined by 6080 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`. When the 6081 corresponding package manager installs the package, it will know to 6082 also install the packages on which it depends. 6083 6084 To ensure that the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` get built, the 6085 previous ``RDEPENDS`` assignment also causes a task dependency to be 6086 added. This dependency is from the recipe's 6087 :ref:`ref-tasks-build` (not to be confused with 6088 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`) task to the 6089 ``do_package_write_*`` task of the recipes that build ``bar`` and 6090 ``baz``. 6091 6092 The names of the packages you list within ``RDEPENDS`` must be the 6093 names of other packages - they cannot be recipe names. Although 6094 package names and recipe names usually match, the important point 6095 here is that you are providing package names within the ``RDEPENDS`` 6096 variable. For an example of the default list of packages created from 6097 a recipe, see the :term:`PACKAGES` variable. 6098 6099 Because the ``RDEPENDS`` variable applies to packages being built, 6100 you should always use the variable in a form with an attached package 6101 name (remember that a single recipe can build multiple packages). For 6102 example, suppose you are building a development package that depends 6103 on the ``perl`` package. In this case, you would use the following 6104 ``RDEPENDS`` statement: 6105 :: 6106 6107 RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev += "perl" 6108 6109 In the example, 6110 the development package depends on the ``perl`` package. Thus, the 6111 ``RDEPENDS`` variable has the ``${PN}-dev`` package name as part of 6112 the variable. 6113 6114 .. note:: 6115 6116 ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev`` includes ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}`` 6117 by default. This default is set in the BitBake configuration file 6118 (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``). Be careful not to accidentally remove 6119 ``${PN}`` when modifying ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev``. Use the "+=" operator 6120 rather than the "=" operator. 6121 6122 The package names you use with ``RDEPENDS`` must appear as they would 6123 in the ``PACKAGES`` variable. The :term:`PKG` variable 6124 allows a different name to be used for the final package (e.g. the 6125 :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class uses this to rename 6126 packages), but this final package name cannot be used with 6127 ``RDEPENDS``, which makes sense as ``RDEPENDS`` is meant to be 6128 independent of the package format used. 6129 6130 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6131 specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies 6132 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6133 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6134 ``RDEPENDS`` variable: 6135 :: 6136 6137 RDEPENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6138 6139 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6140 6141 - = 6142 - < 6143 - > 6144 - <= 6145 - >= 6146 6147 For version, provide the version number. 6148 6149 .. note:: 6150 6151 You can use ``EXTENDPKGV`` to provide a full package version 6152 specification. 6153 6154 For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or 6155 greater of the package ``foo``: 6156 :: 6157 6158 RDEPENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6159 6160 For information on build-time dependencies, see the 6161 :term:`DEPENDS` variable. You can also see the 6162 ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and 6163 ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the 6164 BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and 6165 dependencies. 6166 6167 :term:`REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES` 6168 When inheriting the 6169 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 6170 class, this variable identifies distribution features that must exist 6171 in the current configuration in order for the OpenEmbedded build 6172 system to build the recipe. In other words, if the 6173 ``REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that does not 6174 appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 6175 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 6176 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 6177 6178 :term:`RM_WORK_EXCLUDE` 6179 With ``rm_work`` enabled, this variable specifies a list of recipes 6180 whose work directories should not be removed. See the 6181 ":ref:`rm_work.bbclass <ref-classes-rm-work>`" section for more 6182 details. 6183 6184 :term:`ROOT_HOME` 6185 Defines the root home directory. By default, this directory is set as 6186 follows in the BitBake configuration file: 6187 :: 6188 6189 ROOT_HOME ??= "/home/root" 6190 6191 .. note:: 6192 6193 This default value is likely used because some embedded solutions 6194 prefer to have a read-only root filesystem and prefer to keep 6195 writeable data in one place. 6196 6197 You can override the default by setting the variable in any layer or 6198 in the ``local.conf`` file. Because the default is set using a "weak" 6199 assignment (i.e. "??="), you can use either of the following forms to 6200 define your override: 6201 :: 6202 6203 ROOT_HOME = "/root" 6204 ROOT_HOME ?= "/root" 6205 6206 These 6207 override examples use ``/root``, which is probably the most commonly 6208 used override. 6209 6210 :term:`ROOTFS` 6211 Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem. 6212 6213 The ``ROOTFS`` variable is an optional variable used with the 6214 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class. 6215 6216 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND` 6217 Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build 6218 system has installed packages. You can specify functions separated by 6219 semicolons: 6220 :: 6221 6222 ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6223 6224 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6225 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6226 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6227 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6228 information. 6229 6230 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 6231 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 6232 system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions 6233 separated by semicolons: 6234 :: 6235 6236 ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6237 6238 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6239 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6240 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6241 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6242 information. 6243 6244 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND` 6245 Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build 6246 system has removed unnecessary packages. When runtime package 6247 management is disabled in the image, several packages are removed 6248 including ``base-passwd``, ``shadow``, and ``update-alternatives``. 6249 You can specify functions separated by semicolons: 6250 :: 6251 6252 ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6253 6254 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6255 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6256 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6257 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6258 information. 6259 6260 :term:`ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND` 6261 Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build 6262 system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions 6263 separated by semicolons: 6264 :: 6265 6266 ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6267 6268 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6269 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6270 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6271 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6272 information. 6273 6274 :term:`RPROVIDES` 6275 A list of package name aliases that a package also provides. These 6276 aliases are useful for satisfying runtime dependencies of other 6277 packages both during the build and on the target (as specified by 6278 ``RDEPENDS``). 6279 6280 .. note:: 6281 6282 A package's own name is implicitly already in its ``RPROVIDES`` list. 6283 6284 As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use the 6285 variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an 6286 example: 6287 :: 6288 6289 RPROVIDES_${PN} = "widget-abi-2" 6290 6291 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` 6292 A list of packages that extends the usability of a package being 6293 built. The package being built does not depend on this list of 6294 packages in order to successfully build, but rather uses them for 6295 extended usability. To specify runtime dependencies for packages, see 6296 the ``RDEPENDS`` variable. 6297 6298 The package manager will automatically install the ``RRECOMMENDS`` 6299 list of packages when installing the built package. However, you can 6300 prevent listed packages from being installed by using the 6301 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`, 6302 :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`, and 6303 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables. 6304 6305 Packages specified in ``RRECOMMENDS`` need not actually be produced. 6306 However, a recipe must exist that provides each package, either 6307 through the :term:`PACKAGES` or 6308 :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variables or the 6309 :term:`RPROVIDES` variable, or an error will occur 6310 during the build. If such a recipe does exist and the package is not 6311 produced, the build continues without error. 6312 6313 Because the ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable applies to packages being built, 6314 you should always attach an override to the variable to specify the 6315 particular package whose usability is being extended. For example, 6316 suppose you are building a development package that is extended to 6317 support wireless functionality. In this case, you would use the 6318 following: 6319 :: 6320 6321 RRECOMMENDS_${PN}-dev += "wireless_package_name" 6322 6323 In the 6324 example, the package name (``${PN}-dev``) must appear as it would in 6325 the ``PACKAGES`` namespace before any renaming of the output package 6326 by classes such as ``debian.bbclass``. 6327 6328 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6329 specifying versioned recommends. Although the syntax varies depending 6330 on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences from you. 6331 Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6332 ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable: 6333 :: 6334 6335 RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6336 6337 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6338 6339 - = 6340 - < 6341 - > 6342 - <= 6343 - >= 6344 6345 For example, the following sets up a recommend on version 1.2 or 6346 greater of the package ``foo``: 6347 :: 6348 6349 RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6350 6351 :term:`RREPLACES` 6352 A list of packages replaced by a package. The package manager uses 6353 this variable to determine which package should be installed to 6354 replace other package(s) during an upgrade. In order to also have the 6355 other package(s) removed at the same time, you must add the name of 6356 the other package to the ``RCONFLICTS`` variable. 6357 6358 As with all package-controlling variables, you must use this variable 6359 in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example: 6360 :: 6361 6362 RREPLACES_${PN} = "other_package_being_replaced" 6363 6364 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6365 specifying versioned replacements. Although the syntax varies 6366 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6367 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6368 ``RREPLACES`` variable: 6369 :: 6370 6371 RREPLACES_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6372 6373 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6374 6375 - = 6376 - < 6377 - > 6378 - <= 6379 - >= 6380 6381 For example, the following sets up a replacement using version 1.2 6382 or greater of the package ``foo``: 6383 :: 6384 6385 RREPLACES_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6386 6387 :term:`RSUGGESTS` 6388 A list of additional packages that you can suggest for installation 6389 by the package manager at the time a package is installed. Not all 6390 package managers support this functionality. 6391 6392 As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use this 6393 variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an 6394 example: 6395 :: 6396 6397 RSUGGESTS_${PN} = "useful_package another_package" 6398 6399 :term:`S` 6400 The location in the :term:`Build Directory` where 6401 unpacked recipe source code resides. By default, this directory is 6402 ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}-${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``, 6403 where ``${BPN}`` is the base recipe name and ``${PV}`` is the recipe 6404 version. If the source tarball extracts the code to a directory named 6405 anything other than ``${BPN}-${PV}``, or if the source code is 6406 fetched from an SCM such as Git or Subversion, then you must set 6407 ``S`` in the recipe so that the OpenEmbedded build system knows where 6408 to find the unpacked source. 6409 6410 As an example, assume a :term:`Source Directory` 6411 top-level folder named ``poky`` and a default Build Directory at 6412 ``poky/build``. In this case, the work directory the build system 6413 uses to keep the unpacked recipe for ``db`` is the following: 6414 :: 6415 6416 poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/db/5.1.19-r3/db-5.1.19 6417 6418 The unpacked source code resides in the ``db-5.1.19`` folder. 6419 6420 This next example assumes a Git repository. By default, Git 6421 repositories are cloned to ``${WORKDIR}/git`` during 6422 :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`. Since this path is different 6423 from the default value of ``S``, you must set it specifically so the 6424 source can be located: 6425 :: 6426 6427 SRC_URI = "git://path/to/repo.git" 6428 S = "${WORKDIR}/git" 6429 6430 :term:`SANITY_REQUIRED_UTILITIES` 6431 Specifies a list of command-line utilities that should be checked for 6432 during the initial sanity checking process when running BitBake. If 6433 any of the utilities are not installed on the build host, then 6434 BitBake immediately exits with an error. 6435 6436 :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` 6437 A list of the host distribution identifiers that the build system has 6438 been tested against. Identifiers consist of the host distributor ID 6439 followed by the release, as reported by the ``lsb_release`` tool or 6440 as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. Separate the list items with 6441 explicit newline characters (``\n``). If ``SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS`` is 6442 not empty and the current value of 6443 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` does not appear in the 6444 list, then the build system reports a warning that indicates the 6445 current host distribution has not been tested as a build host. 6446 6447 :term:`SDK_ARCH` 6448 The target architecture for the SDK. Typically, you do not directly 6449 set this variable. Instead, use :term:`SDKMACHINE`. 6450 6451 :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` 6452 The directory set up and used by the 6453 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk>` class to which 6454 the SDK is deployed. The ``populate_sdk_base`` class defines 6455 ``SDK_DEPLOY`` as follows: 6456 :: 6457 6458 SDK_DEPLOY = "${TMPDIR}/deploy/sdk" 6459 6460 :term:`SDK_DIR` 6461 The parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build system when 6462 creating SDK output. The 6463 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class defines 6464 the variable as follows: 6465 :: 6466 6467 SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk" 6468 6469 .. note:: 6470 6471 The ``SDK_DIR`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of 6472 ``WORKDIR``. The final output directory is :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`. 6473 6474 :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` 6475 Controls whether or not shared state artifacts are copied into the 6476 extensible SDK. The default value of "full" copies all of the 6477 required shared state artifacts into the extensible SDK. The value 6478 "minimal" leaves these artifacts out of the SDK. 6479 6480 .. note:: 6481 6482 If you set the variable to "minimal", you need to ensure 6483 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` is set in the SDK's configuration to enable the 6484 artifacts to be fetched as needed. 6485 6486 :term:`SDK_HOST_MANIFEST` 6487 The manifest file for the host part of the SDK. This file lists all 6488 the installed packages that make up the host part of the SDK. The 6489 file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as 6490 follows: 6491 :: 6492 6493 packagename packagearch version 6494 6495 The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class 6496 defines the manifest file as follows: 6497 :: 6498 6499 SDK_HOST_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.host.manifest" 6500 6501 The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and 6502 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables. 6503 6504 :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA` 6505 When set to "1", specifies to include the packagedata for all recipes 6506 in the "world" target in the extensible SDK. Including this data 6507 allows the ``devtool search`` command to find these recipes in search 6508 results, as well as allows the ``devtool add`` command to map 6509 dependencies more effectively. 6510 6511 .. note:: 6512 6513 Enabling the ``SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA`` 6514 variable significantly increases build time because all of world 6515 needs to be built. Enabling the variable also slightly increases 6516 the size of the extensible SDK. 6517 6518 :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN` 6519 When set to "1", specifies to include the toolchain in the extensible 6520 SDK. Including the toolchain is useful particularly when 6521 :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` is set to "minimal" to keep 6522 the SDK reasonably small but you still want to provide a usable 6523 toolchain. For example, suppose you want to use the toolchain from an 6524 IDE or from other tools and you do not want to perform additional 6525 steps to install the toolchain. 6526 6527 The ``SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN`` variable defaults to "0" if 6528 ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "minimal", and defaults to "1" if 6529 ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "full". 6530 6531 :term:`SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST` 6532 A list of classes to remove from the :term:`INHERIT` 6533 value globally within the extensible SDK configuration. The 6534 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets the 6535 default value: 6536 :: 6537 6538 SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST ?= "buildhistory icecc" 6539 6540 Some classes are not generally applicable within the extensible SDK 6541 context. You can use this variable to disable those classes. 6542 6543 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6544 configuration, see the 6545 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6546 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6547 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6548 6549 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST` 6550 A list of variables not allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build 6551 system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. Usually, 6552 these are variables that are specific to the machine on which the 6553 build system is running and thus would be potentially problematic 6554 within the extensible SDK. 6555 6556 By default, ``SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`` is set in the 6557 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class and 6558 excludes the following variables: 6559 6560 - :term:`CONF_VERSION` 6561 - :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS` 6562 - :term:`bitbake:BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS` 6563 - :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` 6564 - :term:`PRSERV_HOST` 6565 - :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` :term:`DL_DIR` 6566 - :term:`SSTATE_DIR` :term:`TMPDIR` 6567 - :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT` 6568 6569 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6570 configuration, see the 6571 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6572 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6573 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6574 6575 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST` 6576 A list of variables allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build 6577 system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. By 6578 default, the list of variables is empty and is set in the 6579 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class. 6580 6581 This list overrides the variables specified using the 6582 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST` 6583 variable as well as any variables identified by automatic 6584 blacklisting due to the "/" character being found at the start of the 6585 value, which is usually indicative of being a path and thus might not 6586 be valid on the system where the SDK is installed. 6587 6588 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6589 configuration, see the 6590 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6591 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6592 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6593 6594 :term:`SDK_NAME` 6595 The base name for SDK output files. The name is derived from the 6596 :term:`DISTRO`, :term:`TCLIBC`, 6597 :term:`SDK_ARCH`, 6598 :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, and 6599 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` variables: 6600 :: 6601 6602 SDK_NAME = "${DISTRO}-${TCLIBC}-${SDK_ARCH}-${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${TUNE_PKGARCH}" 6603 6604 :term:`SDK_OS` 6605 Specifies the operating system for which the SDK will be built. The 6606 default value is the value of :term:`BUILD_OS`. 6607 6608 :term:`SDK_OUTPUT` 6609 The location used by the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK 6610 output. The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` 6611 class defines the variable as follows: 6612 :: 6613 6614 SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk" 6615 SDK_OUTPUT = "${SDK_DIR}/image" 6616 SDK_DEPLOY = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/sdk" 6617 6618 .. note:: 6619 6620 The ``SDK_OUTPUT`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of 6621 :term:`WORKDIR` by way of :term:`SDK_DIR`. The final output directory is 6622 :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`. 6623 6624 :term:`SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS` 6625 Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the SDK machine. 6626 This variable is set automatically and should not normally be 6627 hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order 6628 of priority. The default value for ``SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any 6629 noarch ${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}". 6630 6631 :term:`SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 6632 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 6633 system creates the SDK. You can specify functions separated by 6634 semicolons: SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6635 6636 If you need to pass an SDK path to a command within a function, you 6637 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 6638 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 6639 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 6640 6641 :term:`SDK_PREFIX` 6642 The toolchain binary prefix used for ``nativesdk`` recipes. The 6643 OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``SDK_PREFIX`` value to set the 6644 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building 6645 ``nativesdk`` recipes. The default value is "${SDK_SYS}-". 6646 6647 :term:`SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS` 6648 A list of shared state tasks added to the extensible SDK. By default, 6649 the following tasks are added: 6650 6651 - do_populate_lic 6652 - do_package_qa 6653 - do_populate_sysroot 6654 - do_deploy 6655 6656 Despite the default value of "" for the 6657 ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable, the above four tasks are always added 6658 to the SDK. To specify tasks beyond these four, you need to use the 6659 ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable (e.g. you are defining additional 6660 tasks that are needed in order to build 6661 :term:`SDK_TARGETS`). 6662 6663 :term:`SDK_SYS` 6664 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 6665 system, for which the SDK will be built. 6666 6667 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 6668 on :term:`SDK_ARCH`, 6669 :term:`SDK_VENDOR`, and 6670 :term:`SDK_OS`. You do not need to set the ``SDK_SYS`` 6671 variable yourself. 6672 6673 :term:`SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST` 6674 The manifest file for the target part of the SDK. This file lists all 6675 the installed packages that make up the target part of the SDK. The 6676 file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as 6677 follows: 6678 :: 6679 6680 packagename packagearch version 6681 6682 The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class 6683 defines the manifest file as follows: 6684 :: 6685 6686 SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.target.manifest" 6687 6688 The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and 6689 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables. 6690 6691 :term:`SDK_TARGETS` 6692 A list of targets to install from shared state as part of the 6693 standard or extensible SDK installation. The default value is "${PN}" 6694 (i.e. the image from which the SDK is built). 6695 6696 The ``SDK_TARGETS`` variable is an internal variable and typically 6697 would not be changed. 6698 6699 :term:`SDK_TITLE` 6700 The title to be printed when running the SDK installer. By default, 6701 this title is based on the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` or 6702 :term:`DISTRO` variable and is set in the 6703 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as 6704 follows: 6705 :: 6706 6707 SDK_TITLE ??= "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_NAME') or d.getVar('DISTRO')} SDK" 6708 6709 For the default distribution "poky", 6710 ``SDK_TITLE`` is set to "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)". 6711 6712 For information on how to change this default title, see the 6713 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the extensible sdk installer title`" 6714 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6715 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6716 6717 :term:`SDK_UPDATE_URL` 6718 An optional URL for an update server for the extensible SDK. If set, 6719 the value is used as the default update server when running 6720 ``devtool sdk-update`` within the extensible SDK. 6721 6722 :term:`SDK_VENDOR` 6723 Specifies the name of the SDK vendor. 6724 6725 :term:`SDK_VERSION` 6726 Specifies the version of the SDK. The distribution configuration file 6727 (e.g. ``/meta-poky/conf/distro/poky.conf``) defines the 6728 ``SDK_VERSION`` as follows: 6729 :: 6730 6731 SDK_VERSION = "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_VERSION').replace('snapshot-${DATE}','snapshot')}" 6732 6733 For additional information, see the 6734 :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` and 6735 :term:`DATE` variables. 6736 6737 :term:`SDKEXTPATH` 6738 The default installation directory for the Extensible SDK. By 6739 default, this directory is based on the :term:`DISTRO` 6740 variable and is set in the 6741 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as 6742 follows: 6743 :: 6744 6745 SDKEXTPATH ??= "~/${@d.getVar('DISTRO')}_sdk" 6746 6747 For the 6748 default distribution "poky", the ``SDKEXTPATH`` is set to "poky_sdk". 6749 6750 For information on how to change this default directory, see the 6751 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the default sdk installation directory`" 6752 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6753 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6754 6755 :term:`SDKIMAGE_FEATURES` 6756 Equivalent to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``. However, this variable applies to 6757 the SDK generated from an image using the following command: 6758 :: 6759 6760 $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename 6761 6762 :term:`SDKMACHINE` 6763 The machine for which the SDK is built. In other words, the SDK is 6764 built such that it runs on the target you specify with the 6765 ``SDKMACHINE`` value. The value points to a corresponding ``.conf`` 6766 file under ``conf/machine-sdk/``. 6767 6768 You can use "i686" and "x86_64" as possible values for this variable. 6769 The variable defaults to "i686" and is set in the local.conf file in 6770 the Build Directory. 6771 :: 6772 6773 SDKMACHINE ?= "i686" 6774 6775 .. note:: 6776 6777 You cannot set the ``SDKMACHINE`` 6778 variable in your distribution configuration file. If you do, the 6779 configuration will not take affect. 6780 6781 :term:`SDKPATH` 6782 Defines the path offered to the user for installation of the SDK that 6783 is generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. The path appears as 6784 the default location for installing the SDK when you run the SDK's 6785 installation script. You can override the offered path when you run 6786 the script. 6787 6788 :term:`SDKTARGETSYSROOT` 6789 The full path to the sysroot used for cross-compilation within an SDK 6790 as it will be when installed into the default 6791 :term:`SDKPATH`. 6792 6793 :term:`SECTION` 6794 The section in which packages should be categorized. Package 6795 management utilities can make use of this variable. 6796 6797 :term:`SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION` 6798 Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when 6799 building for the target. The flags are passed through the default 6800 value of the :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` variable. 6801 6802 The ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable takes the value of 6803 ``FULL_OPTIMIZATION`` unless ``DEBUG_BUILD`` = "1". If that is the 6804 case, the value of ``DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`` is used. 6805 6806 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLE` 6807 Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using 6808 `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a 6809 value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name 6810 separated by a space. You cannot specify more than one TTY device: 6811 :: 6812 6813 SERIAL_CONSOLE = "115200 ttyS0" 6814 6815 .. note:: 6816 6817 The ``SERIAL_CONSOLE`` variable is deprecated. Please use the 6818 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` variable. 6819 6820 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` 6821 Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using 6822 `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a 6823 value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name 6824 separated by a semicolon. Use spaces to separate multiple devices: 6825 :: 6826 6827 SERIAL_CONSOLES = "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1" 6828 6829 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK` 6830 Specifies serial consoles, which must be listed in 6831 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`, to check against 6832 ``/proc/console`` before enabling them using getty. This variable 6833 allows aliasing in the format: <device>:<alias>. If a device was 6834 listed as "sclp_line0" in ``/dev/`` and "ttyS0" was listed in 6835 ``/proc/console``, you would do the following: :: 6836 6837 SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK = "slcp_line0:ttyS0" 6838 6839 This variable is currently only supported with SysVinit (i.e. not 6840 with systemd). 6841 6842 :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS` 6843 A list of recipe dependencies that should not be used to determine 6844 signatures of tasks from one recipe when they depend on tasks from 6845 another recipe. For example: :: 6846 6847 SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "intone->mplayer2" 6848 6849 In the previous example, ``intone`` depends on ``mplayer2``. 6850 6851 You can use the special token ``"*"`` on the left-hand side of the 6852 dependency to match all recipes except the one on the right-hand 6853 side. Here is an example: :: 6854 6855 SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "*->quilt-native" 6856 6857 In the previous example, all recipes except ``quilt-native`` ignore 6858 task signatures from the ``quilt-native`` recipe when determining 6859 their task signatures. 6860 6861 Use of this variable is one mechanism to remove dependencies that 6862 affect task signatures and thus force rebuilds when a recipe changes. 6863 6864 .. note:: 6865 6866 If you add an inappropriate dependency for a recipe relationship, 6867 the software might break during runtime if the interface of the 6868 second recipe was changed after the first recipe had been built. 6869 6870 :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDERECIPES_ABISAFE` 6871 A list of recipes that are completely stable and will never change. 6872 The ABI for the recipes in the list are presented by output from the 6873 tasks run to build the recipe. Use of this variable is one way to 6874 remove dependencies from one recipe on another that affect task 6875 signatures and thus force rebuilds when the recipe changes. 6876 6877 .. note:: 6878 6879 If you add an inappropriate variable to this list, the software 6880 might break at runtime if the interface of the recipe was changed 6881 after the other had been built. 6882 6883 :term:`SITEINFO_BITS` 6884 Specifies the number of bits for the target system CPU. The value 6885 should be either "32" or "64". 6886 6887 :term:`SITEINFO_ENDIANNESS` 6888 Specifies the endian byte order of the target system. The value 6889 should be either "le" for little-endian or "be" for big-endian. 6890 6891 :term:`SKIP_FILEDEPS` 6892 Enables removal of all files from the "Provides" section of an RPM 6893 package. Removal of these files is required for packages containing 6894 prebuilt binaries and libraries such as ``libstdc++`` and ``glibc``. 6895 6896 To enable file removal, set the variable to "1" in your 6897 ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file in your: 6898 :term:`Build Directory`. 6899 :: 6900 6901 SKIP_FILEDEPS = "1" 6902 6903 :term:`SOC_FAMILY` 6904 Groups together machines based upon the same family of SOC (System On 6905 Chip). You typically set this variable in a common ``.inc`` file that 6906 you include in the configuration files of all the machines. 6907 6908 .. note:: 6909 6910 You must include ``conf/machine/include/soc-family.inc`` for this 6911 variable to appear in :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. 6912 6913 :term:`SOLIBS` 6914 Defines the suffix for shared libraries used on the target platform. 6915 By default, this suffix is ".so.*" for all Linux-based systems and is 6916 defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. 6917 6918 You will see this variable referenced in the default values of 6919 ``FILES_${PN}``. 6920 6921 :term:`SOLIBSDEV` 6922 Defines the suffix for the development symbolic link (symlink) for 6923 shared libraries on the target platform. By default, this suffix is 6924 ".so" for Linux-based systems and is defined in the 6925 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. 6926 6927 You will see this variable referenced in the default values of 6928 ``FILES_${PN}-dev``. 6929 6930 :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH` 6931 When you are fetching files to create a mirror of sources (i.e. 6932 creating a source mirror), setting ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` to "1" in 6933 your ``local.conf`` configuration file ensures the source for all 6934 recipes are fetched regardless of whether or not a recipe is 6935 compatible with the configuration. A recipe is considered 6936 incompatible with the currently configured machine when either or 6937 both the :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE` 6938 variable and :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` variables 6939 specify compatibility with a machine other than that of the current 6940 machine or host. 6941 6942 .. note:: 6943 6944 Do not set the ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` 6945 variable unless you are creating a source mirror. In other words, 6946 do not set the variable during a normal build. 6947 6948 :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL` 6949 Defines your own :term:`PREMIRRORS` from which to 6950 first fetch source before attempting to fetch from the upstream 6951 specified in :term:`SRC_URI`. 6952 6953 To use this variable, you must globally inherit the 6954 :ref:`own-mirrors <ref-classes-own-mirrors>` class and then provide 6955 the URL to your mirrors. Here is the general syntax: 6956 :: 6957 6958 INHERIT += "own-mirrors" 6959 SOURCE_MIRROR_URL = "http://example.com/my_source_mirror" 6960 6961 .. note:: 6962 6963 You can specify only a single URL in ``SOURCE_MIRROR_URL``. 6964 6965 :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` 6966 Maps commonly used license names to their SPDX counterparts found in 6967 ``meta/files/common-licenses/``. For the default ``SPDXLICENSEMAP`` 6968 mappings, see the ``meta/conf/licenses.conf`` file. 6969 6970 For additional information, see the :term:`LICENSE` 6971 variable. 6972 6973 :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` 6974 A list of prefixes for :term:`PN` used by the OpenEmbedded 6975 build system to create variants of recipes or packages. The list 6976 specifies the prefixes to strip off during certain circumstances such 6977 as the generation of the :term:`BPN` variable. 6978 6979 :term:`SPL_BINARY` 6980 The file type for the Secondary Program Loader (SPL). Some devices 6981 use an SPL from which to boot (e.g. the BeagleBone development 6982 board). For such cases, you can declare the file type of the SPL 6983 binary in the ``u-boot.inc`` include file, which is used in the 6984 U-Boot recipe. 6985 6986 The SPL file type is set to "null" by default in the ``u-boot.inc`` 6987 file as follows: 6988 :: 6989 6990 # Some versions of u-boot build an SPL (Second Program Loader) image that 6991 # should be packaged along with the u-boot binary as well as placed in the 6992 # deploy directory. For those versions they can set the following variables 6993 # to allow packaging the SPL. 6994 SPL_BINARY ?= "" 6995 SPL_BINARYNAME ?= "${@os.path.basename(d.getVar("SPL_BINARY"))}" 6996 SPL_IMAGE ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}-${PV}-${PR}" 6997 SPL_SYMLINK ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}" 6998 6999 The ``SPL_BINARY`` variable helps form 7000 various ``SPL_*`` variables used by the OpenEmbedded build system. 7001 7002 See the BeagleBone machine configuration example in the 7003 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding a layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`" 7004 section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package Developer's Guide 7005 for additional information. 7006 7007 :term:`SRC_URI` 7008 The list of source files - local or remote. This variable tells the 7009 OpenEmbedded build system which bits to pull in for the build and how 7010 to pull them in. For example, if the recipe or append file only needs 7011 to fetch a tarball from the Internet, the recipe or append file uses 7012 a single ``SRC_URI`` entry. On the other hand, if the recipe or 7013 append file needs to fetch a tarball, apply two patches, and include 7014 a custom file, the recipe or append file would include four instances 7015 of the variable. 7016 7017 The following list explains the available URI protocols. URI 7018 protocols are highly dependent on particular BitBake Fetcher 7019 submodules. Depending on the fetcher BitBake uses, various URL 7020 parameters are employed. For specifics on the supported Fetchers, see 7021 the ":ref:`Fetchers <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`" section in the 7022 BitBake User Manual. 7023 7024 - ``file://`` - Fetches files, which are usually files shipped 7025 with the :term:`Metadata`, from the local machine (e.g. 7026 :ref:`patch <overview-manual/concepts:patching>` files). 7027 The path is relative to the :term:`FILESPATH` 7028 variable. Thus, the build system searches, in order, from the 7029 following directories, which are assumed to be a subdirectories of 7030 the directory in which the recipe file (``.bb``) or append file 7031 (``.bbappend``) resides: 7032 7033 - ``${BPN}`` - The base recipe name without any special suffix 7034 or version numbers. 7035 7036 - ``${BP}`` - ``${BPN}-${PV}``. The base recipe name and 7037 version but without any special package name suffix. 7038 7039 - *files -* Files within a directory, which is named ``files`` 7040 and is also alongside the recipe or append file. 7041 7042 .. note:: 7043 7044 If you want the build system to pick up files specified through 7045 a 7046 SRC_URI 7047 statement from your append file, you need to be sure to extend 7048 the 7049 FILESPATH 7050 variable by also using the 7051 FILESEXTRAPATHS 7052 variable from within your append file. 7053 7054 - ``bzr://`` - Fetches files from a Bazaar revision control 7055 repository. 7056 7057 - ``git://`` - Fetches files from a Git revision control 7058 repository. 7059 7060 - ``osc://`` - Fetches files from an OSC (OpenSUSE Build service) 7061 revision control repository. 7062 7063 - ``repo://`` - Fetches files from a repo (Git) repository. 7064 7065 - ``ccrc://`` - Fetches files from a ClearCase repository. 7066 7067 - ``http://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``http``. 7068 7069 - ``https://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``https``. 7070 7071 - ``ftp://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``ftp``. 7072 7073 - ``cvs://`` - Fetches files from a CVS revision control 7074 repository. 7075 7076 - ``hg://`` - Fetches files from a Mercurial (``hg``) revision 7077 control repository. 7078 7079 - ``p4://`` - Fetches files from a Perforce (``p4``) revision 7080 control repository. 7081 7082 - ``ssh://`` - Fetches files from a secure shell. 7083 7084 - ``svn://`` - Fetches files from a Subversion (``svn``) revision 7085 control repository. 7086 7087 - ``npm://`` - Fetches JavaScript modules from a registry. 7088 7089 Standard and recipe-specific options for ``SRC_URI`` exist. Here are 7090 standard options: 7091 7092 - ``apply`` - Whether to apply the patch or not. The default 7093 action is to apply the patch. 7094 7095 - ``striplevel`` - Which striplevel to use when applying the 7096 patch. The default level is 1. 7097 7098 - ``patchdir`` - Specifies the directory in which the patch should 7099 be applied. The default is ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``. 7100 7101 Here are options specific to recipes building code from a revision 7102 control system: 7103 7104 - ``mindate`` - Apply the patch only if 7105 :term:`SRCDATE` is equal to or greater than 7106 ``mindate``. 7107 7108 - ``maxdate`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCDATE`` is not later 7109 than ``maxdate``. 7110 7111 - ``minrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to or 7112 greater than ``minrev``. 7113 7114 - ``maxrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not later 7115 than ``maxrev``. 7116 7117 - ``rev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to 7118 ``rev``. 7119 7120 - ``notrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not equal to 7121 ``rev``. 7122 7123 Here are some additional options worth mentioning: 7124 7125 - ``unpack`` - Controls whether or not to unpack the file if it is 7126 an archive. The default action is to unpack the file. 7127 7128 - ``destsuffix`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into 7129 the specified subdirectory of :term:`WORKDIR` when 7130 the Git fetcher is used. 7131 7132 - ``subdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into the 7133 specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the local (``file://``) 7134 fetcher is used. 7135 7136 - ``localdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into 7137 the specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the CVS fetcher is 7138 used. 7139 7140 - ``subpath`` - Limits the checkout to a specific subpath of the 7141 tree when using the Git fetcher is used. 7142 7143 - ``name`` - Specifies a name to be used for association with 7144 ``SRC_URI`` checksums or :term:`SRCREV` when you have more than one 7145 file or git repository specified in ``SRC_URI``. For example: 7146 :: 7147 7148 SRC_URI = "git://example.com/foo.git;name=first \ 7149 git://example.com/bar.git;name=second \ 7150 http://example.com/file.tar.gz;name=third" 7151 7152 SRCREV_first = "f1d2d2f924e986ac86fdf7b36c94bcdf32beec15" 7153 SRCREV_second = "e242ed3bffccdf271b7fbaf34ed72d089537b42f" 7154 SRC_URI[third.sha256sum] = "13550350a8681c84c861aac2e5b440161c2b33a3e4f302ac680ca5b686de48de" 7155 7156 7157 - ``downloadfilename`` - Specifies the filename used when storing 7158 the downloaded file. 7159 7160 :term:`SRC_URI_OVERRIDES_PACKAGE_ARCH` 7161 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically detects 7162 whether ``SRC_URI`` contains files that are machine-specific. If so, 7163 the build system automatically changes ``PACKAGE_ARCH``. Setting this 7164 variable to "0" disables this behavior. 7165 7166 :term:`SRCDATE` 7167 The date of the source code used to build the package. This variable 7168 applies only if the source was fetched from a Source Code Manager 7169 (SCM). 7170 7171 :term:`SRCPV` 7172 Returns the version string of the current package. This string is 7173 used to help define the value of :term:`PV`. 7174 7175 The ``SRCPV`` variable is defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` 7176 configuration file in the :term:`Source Directory` as 7177 follows: 7178 :: 7179 7180 SRCPV = "${@bb.fetch2.get_srcrev(d)}" 7181 7182 Recipes that need to define ``PV`` do so with the help of the 7183 ``SRCPV``. For example, the ``ofono`` recipe (``ofono_git.bb``) 7184 located in ``meta/recipes-connectivity`` in the Source Directory 7185 defines ``PV`` as follows: 7186 :: 7187 7188 PV = "0.12-git${SRCPV}" 7189 7190 :term:`SRCREV` 7191 The revision of the source code used to build the package. This 7192 variable applies to Subversion, Git, Mercurial, and Bazaar only. Note 7193 that if you want to build a fixed revision and you want to avoid 7194 performing a query on the remote repository every time BitBake parses 7195 your recipe, you should specify a ``SRCREV`` that is a full revision 7196 identifier and not just a tag. 7197 7198 .. note:: 7199 7200 For information on limitations when inheriting the latest revision 7201 of software using ``SRCREV``, see the :term:`AUTOREV` variable 7202 description and the 7203 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`" 7204 section, which is in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 7205 7206 :term:`SSTATE_DIR` 7207 The directory for the shared state cache. 7208 7209 :term:`SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK` 7210 If set to "1", allows fetches from mirrors that are specified in 7211 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` to work even when 7212 fetching from the network is disabled by setting ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` to 7213 "1". Using the ``SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK`` variable is useful if 7214 you have set ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` to point to an internal server for 7215 your shared state cache, but you want to disable any other fetching 7216 from the network. 7217 7218 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` 7219 Configures the OpenEmbedded build system to search other mirror 7220 locations for prebuilt cache data objects before building out the 7221 data. This variable works like fetcher :term:`MIRRORS` 7222 and :term:`PREMIRRORS` and points to the cache 7223 locations to check for the shared state (sstate) objects. 7224 7225 You can specify a filesystem directory or a remote URL such as HTTP 7226 or FTP. The locations you specify need to contain the shared state 7227 cache (sstate-cache) results from previous builds. The sstate-cache 7228 you point to can also be from builds on other machines. 7229 7230 When pointing to sstate build artifacts on another machine that uses 7231 a different GCC version for native builds, you must configure 7232 ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` with a regular expression that maps local search 7233 paths to server paths. The paths need to take into account 7234 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` set by the 7235 :ref:`uninative <ref-classes-uninative>` class. For example, the 7236 following maps the local search path ``universal-4.9`` to the 7237 server-provided path server_url_sstate_path: 7238 :: 7239 7240 SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "file://universal-4.9/(.*) http://server_url_sstate_path/universal-4.8/\1 \n" 7241 7242 If a mirror uses the same structure as 7243 :term:`SSTATE_DIR`, you need to add "PATH" at the 7244 end as shown in the examples below. The build system substitutes the 7245 correct path within the directory structure. 7246 :: 7247 7248 SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "\ 7249 file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH;downloadfilename=PATH \n \ 7250 file://.* file:///some-local-dir/sstate/PATH" 7251 7252 :term:`SSTATE_SCAN_FILES` 7253 Controls the list of files the OpenEmbedded build system scans for 7254 hardcoded installation paths. The variable uses a space-separated 7255 list of filenames (not paths) with standard wildcard characters 7256 allowed. 7257 7258 During a build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a shared state 7259 (sstate) object during the first stage of preparing the sysroots. 7260 That object is scanned for hardcoded paths for original installation 7261 locations. The list of files that are scanned for paths is controlled 7262 by the ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` variable. Typically, recipes add files 7263 they want to be scanned to the value of ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` rather 7264 than the variable being comprehensively set. The 7265 :ref:`sstate <ref-classes-sstate>` class specifies the default list 7266 of files. 7267 7268 For details on the process, see the 7269 :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. 7270 7271 :term:`STAGING_BASE_LIBDIR_NATIVE` 7272 Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7273 directory for the build host. 7274 7275 :term:`STAGING_BASELIBDIR` 7276 Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7277 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7278 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7279 7280 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR` 7281 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7282 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7283 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7284 7285 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_CROSS` 7286 Specifies the path to the directory containing binary configuration 7287 scripts. These scripts provide configuration information for other 7288 software that wants to make use of libraries or include files 7289 provided by the software associated with the script. 7290 7291 .. note:: 7292 7293 This style of build configuration has been largely replaced by 7294 ``pkg-config``. Consequently, if ``pkg-config`` is supported by the 7295 library to which you are linking, it is recommended you use 7296 ``pkg-config`` instead of a provided configuration script. 7297 7298 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE` 7299 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7300 directory for the build host. 7301 7302 :term:`STAGING_DATADIR` 7303 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7304 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7305 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7306 7307 :term:`STAGING_DATADIR_NATIVE` 7308 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7309 directory for the build host. 7310 7311 :term:`STAGING_DIR` 7312 Helps construct the ``recipe-sysroots`` directory, which is used 7313 during packaging. 7314 7315 For information on how staging for recipe-specific sysroots occurs, 7316 see the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` 7317 task, the ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:sharing files between recipes`" 7318 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual, the 7319 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:configuration, compilation, and staging`" 7320 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, and the 7321 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` variable. 7322 7323 .. note:: 7324 7325 Recipes should never write files directly under the ``STAGING_DIR`` 7326 directory because the OpenEmbedded build system manages the 7327 directory automatically. Instead, files should be installed to 7328 ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}`` within your recipe's :ref:`ref-tasks-install` 7329 task and then the OpenEmbedded build system will stage a subset of 7330 those files into the sysroot. 7331 7332 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST` 7333 Specifies the path to the sysroot directory for the system on which 7334 the component is built to run (the system that hosts the component). 7335 For most recipes, this sysroot is the one in which that recipe's 7336 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task copies 7337 files. Exceptions include ``-native`` recipes, where the 7338 ``do_populate_sysroot`` task instead uses 7339 :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`. Depending on 7340 the type of recipe and the build target, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` can 7341 have the following values: 7342 7343 - For recipes building for the target machine, the value is 7344 "${:term:`STAGING_DIR`}/${:term:`MACHINE`}". 7345 7346 - For native recipes building for the build host, the value is empty 7347 given the assumption that when building for the build host, the 7348 build host's own directories should be used. 7349 7350 .. note:: 7351 7352 ``-native`` recipes are not installed into host paths like such 7353 as ``/usr``. Rather, these recipes are installed into 7354 ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE``. When compiling ``-native`` recipes, 7355 standard build environment variables such as 7356 :term:`CPPFLAGS` and 7357 :term:`CFLAGS` are set up so that both host paths 7358 and ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`` are searched for libraries and 7359 headers using, for example, GCC's ``-isystem`` option. 7360 7361 Thus, the emphasis is that the ``STAGING_DIR*`` variables 7362 should be viewed as input variables by tasks such as 7363 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`, 7364 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`, and 7365 :ref:`ref-tasks-install`. Having the real system 7366 root correspond to ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` makes conceptual sense 7367 for ``-native`` recipes, as they make use of host headers and 7368 libraries. 7369 7370 :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE` 7371 Specifies the path to the sysroot directory used when building 7372 components that run on the build host itself. 7373 7374 :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` 7375 Specifies the path to the sysroot used for the system for which the 7376 component generates code. For components that do not generate code, 7377 which is the majority, ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` is set to match 7378 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`. 7379 7380 Some recipes build binaries that can run on the target system but 7381 those binaries in turn generate code for another different system 7382 (e.g. cross-canadian recipes). Using terminology from GNU, the 7383 primary system is referred to as the "HOST" and the secondary, or 7384 different, system is referred to as the "TARGET". Thus, the binaries 7385 run on the "HOST" system and generate binaries for the "TARGET" 7386 system. The ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` variable points to the sysroot used 7387 for the "HOST" system, while ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` points to the 7388 sysroot used for the "TARGET" system. 7389 7390 :term:`STAGING_ETCDIR_NATIVE` 7391 Specifies the path to the ``/etc`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7392 directory for the build host. 7393 7394 :term:`STAGING_EXECPREFIXDIR` 7395 Specifies the path to the ``/usr`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7396 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7397 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7398 7399 :term:`STAGING_INCDIR` 7400 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the 7401 sysroot directory for the target for which the current recipe being 7402 built (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7403 7404 :term:`STAGING_INCDIR_NATIVE` 7405 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the 7406 sysroot directory for the build host. 7407 7408 :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR` 7409 Points to the directory containing the kernel build artifacts. 7410 Recipes building software that needs to access kernel build artifacts 7411 (e.g. ``systemtap-uprobes``) can look in the directory specified with 7412 the ``STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR`` variable to find these artifacts 7413 after the kernel has been built. 7414 7415 :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` 7416 The directory with kernel headers that are required to build 7417 out-of-tree modules. 7418 7419 :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR` 7420 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7421 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7422 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7423 7424 :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR_NATIVE` 7425 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7426 directory for the build host. 7427 7428 :term:`STAMP` 7429 Specifies the base path used to create recipe stamp files. The path 7430 to an actual stamp file is constructed by evaluating this string and 7431 then appending additional information. Currently, the default 7432 assignment for ``STAMP`` as set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` 7433 file is: 7434 :: 7435 7436 STAMP = "${STAMPS_DIR}/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}" 7437 7438 For information on how BitBake uses stamp files to determine if a 7439 task should be rerun, see the 7440 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:stamp files and the rerunning of tasks`" 7441 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 7442 7443 See :term:`STAMPS_DIR`, 7444 :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`, 7445 :term:`PN`, :term:`EXTENDPE`, 7446 :term:`PV`, and :term:`PR` for related variable 7447 information. 7448 7449 :term:`STAMPS_DIR` 7450 Specifies the base directory in which the OpenEmbedded build system 7451 places stamps. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/stamps``. 7452 7453 :term:`STRIP` 7454 The minimal command and arguments to run ``strip``, which is used to 7455 strip symbols. 7456 7457 :term:`SUMMARY` 7458 The short (72 characters or less) summary of the binary package for 7459 packaging systems such as ``opkg``, ``rpm``, or ``dpkg``. By default, 7460 ``SUMMARY`` is used to define the 7461 :term:`DESCRIPTION` variable if ``DESCRIPTION`` is 7462 not set in the recipe. 7463 7464 :term:`SVNDIR` 7465 The directory in which files checked out of a Subversion system are 7466 stored. 7467 7468 :term:`SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE` 7469 Specifies the kernel boot default console. If you want to use a 7470 console other than the default, set this variable in your recipe as 7471 follows where "X" is the console number you want to use: 7472 :: 7473 7474 SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE = "console=ttyX" 7475 7476 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class initially sets 7477 this variable to null but then checks for a value later. 7478 7479 :term:`SYSLINUX_OPTS` 7480 Lists additional options to add to the syslinux file. You need to set 7481 this variable in your recipe. If you want to list multiple options, 7482 separate the options with a semicolon character (``;``). 7483 7484 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class uses this variable 7485 to create a set of options. 7486 7487 :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL` 7488 Specifies the alternate serial port or turns it off. To turn off 7489 serial, set this variable to an empty string in your recipe. The 7490 variable's default value is set in the 7491 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows: 7492 :: 7493 7494 SYSLINUX_SERIAL ?= "0 115200" 7495 7496 The class checks for and uses the variable as needed. 7497 7498 :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY` 7499 Specifies the alternate console=tty... kernel boot argument. The 7500 variable's default value is set in the 7501 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows: 7502 :: 7503 7504 SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY ?= "console=ttyS0,115200" 7505 7506 The class checks for and uses the variable as needed. 7507 7508 :term:`SYSLINUX_SPLASH` 7509 An ``.LSS`` file used as the background for the VGA boot menu when 7510 you use the boot menu. You need to set this variable in your recipe. 7511 7512 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks for this 7513 variable and if found, the OpenEmbedded build system installs the 7514 splash screen. 7515 7516 :term:`SYSROOT_DESTDIR` 7517 Points to the temporary directory under the work directory (default 7518 "``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/sysroot-destdir``") 7519 where the files populated into the sysroot are assembled during the 7520 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. 7521 7522 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` 7523 Directories that are staged into the sysroot by the 7524 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. By 7525 default, the following directories are staged: 7526 :: 7527 7528 SYSROOT_DIRS = " \ 7529 ${includedir} \ 7530 ${libdir} \ 7531 ${base_libdir} \ 7532 ${nonarch_base_libdir} \ 7533 ${datadir} \ 7534 " 7535 7536 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST` 7537 Directories that are not staged into the sysroot by the 7538 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. You 7539 can use this variable to exclude certain subdirectories of 7540 directories listed in :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` from 7541 staging. By default, the following directories are not staged: 7542 :: 7543 7544 SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST = " \ 7545 ${mandir} \ 7546 ${docdir} \ 7547 ${infodir} \ 7548 ${datadir}/locale \ 7549 ${datadir}/applications \ 7550 ${datadir}/fonts \ 7551 ${datadir}/pixmaps \ 7552 " 7553 7554 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE` 7555 Extra directories staged into the sysroot by the 7556 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task for 7557 ``-native`` recipes, in addition to those specified in 7558 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS`. By default, the following 7559 extra directories are staged: 7560 :: 7561 7562 SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE = " \ 7563 ${bindir} \ 7564 ${sbindir} \ 7565 ${base_bindir} \ 7566 ${base_sbindir} \ 7567 ${libexecdir} \ 7568 ${sysconfdir} \ 7569 ${localstatedir} \ 7570 " 7571 7572 .. note:: 7573 7574 Programs built by ``-native`` recipes run directly from the sysroot 7575 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`), which is why additional directories 7576 containing program executables and supporting files need to be staged. 7577 7578 :term:`SYSROOT_PREPROCESS_FUNCS` 7579 A list of functions to execute after files are staged into the 7580 sysroot. These functions are usually used to apply additional 7581 processing on the staged files, or to stage additional files. 7582 7583 :term:`SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE` 7584 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7585 this variable specifies whether the specified service in 7586 :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` should start 7587 automatically or not. By default, the service is enabled to 7588 automatically start at boot time. The default setting is in the 7589 :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class as follows: 7590 :: 7591 7592 SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE ??= "enable" 7593 7594 You can disable the service by setting the variable to "disable". 7595 7596 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG` 7597 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7598 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` variable specifies the 7599 configuration file that should be used. By default, the 7600 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7601 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` as follows: 7602 :: 7603 7604 SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG ?= "${:term:`S`}/loader.conf" 7605 7606 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7607 documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7608 7609 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES` 7610 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7611 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` variable specifies a 7612 list of entry files (``*.conf``) to install that contain one boot 7613 entry per file. By default, the 7614 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7615 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` as follows: 7616 :: 7617 7618 SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES ?= "" 7619 7620 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7621 documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7622 7623 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT` 7624 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7625 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` variable specifies the 7626 boot menu timeout in seconds. By default, the 7627 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7628 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` as follows: 7629 :: 7630 7631 SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT ?= "10" 7632 7633 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7634 documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7635 7636 :term:`SYSTEMD_PACKAGES` 7637 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7638 this variable locates the systemd unit files when they are not found 7639 in the main recipe's package. By default, the ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` 7640 variable is set such that the systemd unit files are assumed to 7641 reside in the recipes main package: 7642 :: 7643 7644 SYSTEMD_PACKAGES ?= "${PN}" 7645 7646 If these unit files are not in this recipe's main package, you need 7647 to use ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` to list the package or packages in which 7648 the build system can find the systemd unit files. 7649 7650 :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` 7651 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7652 this variable specifies the systemd service name for a package. 7653 7654 When you specify this file in your recipe, use a package name 7655 override to indicate the package to which the value applies. Here is 7656 an example from the connman recipe: 7657 :: 7658 7659 SYSTEMD_SERVICE_${PN} = "connman.service" 7660 7661 :term:`SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS` 7662 When using 7663 :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`, 7664 specifies a space-separated list of the virtual terminals that should 7665 run a `getty <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ 7666 (allowing login), assuming :term:`USE_VT` is not set to 7667 "0". 7668 7669 The default value for ``SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS`` is "1" (i.e. only 7670 run a getty on the first virtual terminal). 7671 7672 :term:`T` 7673 This variable points to a directory were BitBake places temporary 7674 files, which consist mostly of task logs and scripts, when building a 7675 particular recipe. The variable is typically set as follows: 7676 :: 7677 7678 T = "${WORKDIR}/temp" 7679 7680 The :term:`WORKDIR` is the directory into which 7681 BitBake unpacks and builds the recipe. The default ``bitbake.conf`` 7682 file sets this variable. 7683 7684 The ``T`` variable is not to be confused with the 7685 :term:`TMPDIR` variable, which points to the root of 7686 the directory tree where BitBake places the output of an entire 7687 build. 7688 7689 :term:`TARGET_ARCH` 7690 The target machine's architecture. The OpenEmbedded build system 7691 supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures 7692 supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is 7693 configurable: 7694 7695 - arm 7696 - i586 7697 - x86_64 7698 - powerpc 7699 - powerpc64 7700 - mips 7701 - mipsel 7702 7703 For additional information on machine architectures, see the 7704 :term:`TUNE_ARCH` variable. 7705 7706 :term:`TARGET_AS_ARCH` 7707 Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target 7708 system. ``TARGET_AS_ARCH`` is initialized from 7709 :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` by default in the BitBake 7710 configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``): 7711 :: 7712 7713 TARGET_AS_ARCH = "${TUNE_ASARGS}" 7714 7715 :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` 7716 Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target 7717 system. ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` is initialized from 7718 :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` by default. 7719 7720 .. note:: 7721 7722 It is a common workaround to append :term:`LDFLAGS` to 7723 ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` in recipes that build software for the target that 7724 would not otherwise respect the exported ``LDFLAGS`` variable. 7725 7726 :term:`TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH` 7727 This is a specific kernel compiler flag for a CPU or Application 7728 Binary Interface (ABI) tune. The flag is used rarely and only for 7729 cases where a userspace :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` is not 7730 compatible with the kernel compilation. The ``TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH`` 7731 variable allows the kernel (and associated modules) to use a 7732 different configuration. See the 7733 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/feature-arm-thumb.inc`` file in the 7734 :term:`Source Directory` for an example. 7735 7736 :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` 7737 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 7738 target. When building in the target context, 7739 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 7740 default. 7741 7742 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the ``CFLAGS`` 7743 variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` value so that 7744 executables built using the SDK also have the flags applied. 7745 7746 :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` 7747 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 7748 C and the C++ compilers) when building for the target. When building 7749 in the target context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set to the 7750 value of this variable by default. 7751 7752 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7753 ``CPPFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CPPFLAGS`` 7754 value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags 7755 applied. 7756 7757 :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` 7758 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 7759 target. When building in the target context, 7760 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 7761 by default. 7762 7763 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7764 ``CXXFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CXXFLAGS`` 7765 value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags 7766 applied. 7767 7768 :term:`TARGET_FPU` 7769 Specifies the method for handling FPU code. For FPU-less targets, 7770 which include most ARM CPUs, the variable must be set to "soft". If 7771 not, the kernel emulation gets used, which results in a performance 7772 penalty. 7773 7774 :term:`TARGET_LD_ARCH` 7775 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system. 7776 ``TARGET_LD_ARCH`` is initialized from 7777 :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` by default in the BitBake 7778 configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``): 7779 :: 7780 7781 TARGET_LD_ARCH = "${TUNE_LDARGS}" 7782 7783 :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` 7784 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the 7785 target. When building in the target context, 7786 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 7787 by default. 7788 7789 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7790 :term:`LDFLAGS` variable in the environment to the 7791 ``TARGET_LDFLAGS`` value so that executables built using the SDK also 7792 have the flags applied. 7793 7794 :term:`TARGET_OS` 7795 Specifies the target's operating system. The variable can be set to 7796 "linux" for glibc-based systems (GNU C Library) and to "linux-musl" 7797 for musl libc. For ARM/EABI targets, "linux-gnueabi" and 7798 "linux-musleabi" possible values exist. 7799 7800 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` 7801 Specifies the prefix used for the toolchain binary target tools. 7802 7803 Depending on the type of recipe and the build target, 7804 ``TARGET_PREFIX`` is set as follows: 7805 7806 - For recipes building for the target machine, the value is 7807 "${:term:`TARGET_SYS`}-". 7808 7809 - For native recipes, the build system sets the variable to the 7810 value of ``BUILD_PREFIX``. 7811 7812 - For native SDK recipes (``nativesdk``), the build system sets the 7813 variable to the value of ``SDK_PREFIX``. 7814 7815 :term:`TARGET_SYS` 7816 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 7817 system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the 7818 current recipe. 7819 7820 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 7821 on :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, 7822 :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`, and 7823 :term:`TARGET_OS` variables. 7824 7825 .. note:: 7826 7827 You do not need to set the ``TARGET_SYS`` variable yourself. 7828 7829 Consider these two examples: 7830 7831 - Given a native recipe on a 32-bit, x86 machine running Linux, the 7832 value is "i686-linux". 7833 7834 - Given a recipe being built for a little-endian, MIPS target 7835 running Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux". 7836 7837 :term:`TARGET_VENDOR` 7838 Specifies the name of the target vendor. 7839 7840 :term:`TCLIBC` 7841 Specifies the GNU standard C library (``libc``) variant to use during 7842 the build process. This variable replaces ``POKYLIBC``, which is no 7843 longer supported. 7844 7845 You can select "glibc", "musl", "newlib", or "baremetal" 7846 7847 :term:`TCLIBCAPPEND` 7848 Specifies a suffix to be appended onto the 7849 :term:`TMPDIR` value. The suffix identifies the 7850 ``libc`` variant for building. When you are building for multiple 7851 variants with the same :term:`Build Directory`, this 7852 mechanism ensures that output for different ``libc`` variants is kept 7853 separate to avoid potential conflicts. 7854 7855 In the ``defaultsetup.conf`` file, the default value of 7856 ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` is "-${TCLIBC}". However, distros such as poky, 7857 which normally only support one ``libc`` variant, set 7858 ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` to "" in their distro configuration file resulting 7859 in no suffix being applied. 7860 7861 :term:`TCMODE` 7862 Specifies the toolchain selector. ``TCMODE`` controls the 7863 characteristics of the generated packages and images by telling the 7864 OpenEmbedded build system which toolchain profile to use. By default, 7865 the OpenEmbedded build system builds its own internal toolchain. The 7866 variable's default value is "default", which uses that internal 7867 toolchain. 7868 7869 .. note:: 7870 7871 If ``TCMODE`` is set to a value other than "default", then it is your 7872 responsibility to ensure that the toolchain is compatible with the 7873 default toolchain. Using older or newer versions of these 7874 components might cause build problems. See the Release Notes for 7875 the Yocto Project release for the specific components with which 7876 the toolchain must be compatible. To access the Release Notes, go 7877 to the :yocto_home:`Downloads </software-overview/downloads>` 7878 page on the Yocto Project website and click on the "RELEASE 7879 INFORMATION" link for the appropriate release. 7880 7881 The ``TCMODE`` variable is similar to :term:`TCLIBC`, 7882 which controls the variant of the GNU standard C library (``libc``) 7883 used during the build process: ``glibc`` or ``musl``. 7884 7885 With additional layers, it is possible to use a pre-compiled external 7886 toolchain. One example is the Sourcery G++ Toolchain. The support for 7887 this toolchain resides in the separate Mentor Graphics 7888 ``meta-sourcery`` layer at 7889 http://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/. 7890 7891 The layer's ``README`` file contains information on how to use the 7892 Sourcery G++ Toolchain as an external toolchain. In summary, you must 7893 be sure to add the layer to your ``bblayers.conf`` file in front of 7894 the ``meta`` layer and then set the ``EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN`` variable 7895 in your ``local.conf`` file to the location in which you installed 7896 the toolchain. 7897 7898 The fundamentals used for this example apply to any external 7899 toolchain. You can use ``meta-sourcery`` as a template for adding 7900 support for other external toolchains. 7901 7902 :term:`TEST_EXPORT_DIR` 7903 The location the OpenEmbedded build system uses to export tests when 7904 the :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` variable is set 7905 to "1". 7906 7907 The ``TEST_EXPORT_DIR`` variable defaults to 7908 ``"${TMPDIR}/testimage/${PN}"``. 7909 7910 :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` 7911 Specifies to export the tests only. Set this variable to "1" if you 7912 do not want to run the tests but you want them to be exported in a 7913 manner that you to run them outside of the build system. 7914 7915 :term:`TEST_LOG_DIR` 7916 Holds the SSH log and the boot log for QEMU machines. The 7917 ``TEST_LOG_DIR`` variable defaults to ``"${WORKDIR}/testimage"``. 7918 7919 .. note:: 7920 7921 Actual test results reside in the task log (``log.do_testimage``), 7922 which is in the ``${WORKDIR}/temp/`` directory. 7923 7924 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD` 7925 For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to 7926 control the power of the target machine under test. Typically, this 7927 command would point to a script that performs the appropriate action 7928 (e.g. interacting with a web-enabled power strip). The specified 7929 command should expect to receive as the last argument "off", "on" or 7930 "cycle" specifying to power off, on, or cycle (power off and then 7931 power on) the device, respectively. 7932 7933 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` 7934 For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to 7935 pass through to the command specified in 7936 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`. Setting 7937 ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you 7938 wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and 7939 non-machine-specific parts of the arguments. 7940 7941 :term:`TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT` 7942 The time in seconds allowed for an image to boot before automated 7943 runtime tests begin to run against an image. The default timeout 7944 period to allow the boot process to reach the login prompt is 500 7945 seconds. You can specify a different value in the ``local.conf`` 7946 file. 7947 7948 For more information on testing images, see the 7949 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 7950 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 7951 7952 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD` 7953 For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to 7954 connect to the serial console of the target machine under test. This 7955 command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward 7956 that connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal 7957 program does. 7958 7959 For example, to use the Picocom terminal program on serial device 7960 ``/dev/ttyUSB0`` at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows: 7961 :: 7962 7963 TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200" 7964 7965 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` 7966 For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to 7967 pass through to the command specified in 7968 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`. Setting 7969 ``TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you 7970 wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and 7971 non-machine-specific parts of the command. 7972 7973 :term:`TEST_SERVER_IP` 7974 The IP address of the build machine (host machine). This IP address 7975 is usually automatically detected. However, if detection fails, this 7976 variable needs to be set to the IP address of the build machine (i.e. 7977 where the build is taking place). 7978 7979 .. note:: 7980 7981 The ``TEST_SERVER_IP`` variable is only used for a small number of 7982 tests such as the "dnf" test suite, which needs to download packages 7983 from ``WORKDIR/oe-rootfs-repo``. 7984 7985 :term:`TEST_SUITES` 7986 An ordered list of tests (modules) to run against an image when 7987 performing automated runtime testing. 7988 7989 The OpenEmbedded build system provides a core set of tests that can 7990 be used against images. 7991 7992 .. note:: 7993 7994 Currently, there is only support for running these tests under 7995 QEMU. 7996 7997 Tests include ``ping``, ``ssh``, ``df`` among others. You can add 7998 your own tests to the list of tests by appending ``TEST_SUITES`` as 7999 follows: 8000 :: 8001 8002 TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest" 8003 8004 Alternatively, you can 8005 provide the "auto" option to have all applicable tests run against 8006 the image. 8007 :: 8008 8009 TEST_SUITES_append = " auto" 8010 8011 Using this option causes the 8012 build system to automatically run tests that are applicable to the 8013 image. Tests that are not applicable are skipped. 8014 8015 The order in which tests are run is important. Tests that depend on 8016 another test must appear later in the list than the test on which 8017 they depend. For example, if you append the list of tests with two 8018 tests (``test_A`` and ``test_B``) where ``test_B`` is dependent on 8019 ``test_A``, then you must order the tests as follows: 8020 :: 8021 8022 TEST_SUITES = "test_A test_B" 8023 8024 For more information on testing images, see the 8025 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 8026 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 8027 8028 :term:`TEST_TARGET` 8029 Specifies the target controller to use when running tests against a 8030 test image. The default controller to use is "qemu": 8031 :: 8032 8033 TEST_TARGET = "qemu" 8034 8035 A target controller is a class that defines how an image gets 8036 deployed on a target and how a target is started. A layer can extend 8037 the controllers by adding a module in the layer's 8038 ``/lib/oeqa/controllers`` directory and by inheriting the 8039 ``BaseTarget`` class, which is an abstract class that cannot be used 8040 as a value of ``TEST_TARGET``. 8041 8042 You can provide the following arguments with ``TEST_TARGET``: 8043 8044 - *"qemu":* Boots a QEMU image and runs the tests. See the 8045 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on qemu`" section 8046 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more 8047 information. 8048 8049 - *"simpleremote":* Runs the tests on target hardware that is 8050 already up and running. The hardware can be on the network or it 8051 can be a device running an image on QEMU. You must also set 8052 :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` when you use 8053 "simpleremote". 8054 8055 .. note:: 8056 8057 This argument is defined in 8058 ``meta/lib/oeqa/controllers/simpleremote.py``. 8059 8060 For information on running tests on hardware, see the 8061 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on hardware`" 8062 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 8063 8064 :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` 8065 The IP address of your hardware under test. The ``TEST_TARGET_IP`` 8066 variable has no effect when :term:`TEST_TARGET` is 8067 set to "qemu". 8068 8069 When you specify the IP address, you can also include a port. Here is 8070 an example: 8071 :: 8072 8073 TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.1.4:2201" 8074 8075 Specifying a port is 8076 useful when SSH is started on a non-standard port or in cases when 8077 your hardware under test is behind a firewall or network that is not 8078 directly accessible from your host and you need to do port address 8079 translation. 8080 8081 :term:`TESTIMAGE_AUTO` 8082 Automatically runs the series of automated tests for images when an 8083 image is successfully built. Setting ``TESTIMAGE_AUTO`` to "1" causes 8084 any image that successfully builds to automatically boot under QEMU. 8085 Using the variable also adds in dependencies so that any SDK for 8086 which testing is requested is automatically built first. 8087 8088 These tests are written in Python making use of the ``unittest`` 8089 module, and the majority of them run commands on the target system 8090 over ``ssh``. You can set this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` 8091 file in the :term:`Build Directory` to have the 8092 OpenEmbedded build system automatically run these tests after an 8093 image successfully builds: 8094 8095 TESTIMAGE_AUTO = "1" 8096 8097 For more information 8098 on enabling, running, and writing these tests, see the 8099 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 8100 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual and the 8101 ":ref:`testimage*.bbclass <ref-classes-testimage*>`" section. 8102 8103 :term:`THISDIR` 8104 The directory in which the file BitBake is currently parsing is 8105 located. Do not manually set this variable. 8106 8107 :term:`TIME` 8108 The time the build was started. Times appear using the hour, minute, 8109 and second (HMS) format (e.g. "140159" for one minute and fifty-nine 8110 seconds past 1400 hours). 8111 8112 :term:`TMPDIR` 8113 This variable is the base directory the OpenEmbedded build system 8114 uses for all build output and intermediate files (other than the 8115 shared state cache). By default, the ``TMPDIR`` variable points to 8116 ``tmp`` within the :term:`Build Directory`. 8117 8118 If you want to establish this directory in a location other than the 8119 default, you can uncomment and edit the following statement in the 8120 ``conf/local.conf`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`: 8121 :: 8122 8123 #TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmp" 8124 8125 An example use for this scenario is to set ``TMPDIR`` to a local disk, 8126 which does not use NFS, while having the Build Directory use NFS. 8127 8128 The filesystem used by ``TMPDIR`` must have standard filesystem 8129 semantics (i.e. mixed-case files are unique, POSIX file locking, and 8130 persistent inodes). Due to various issues with NFS and bugs in some 8131 implementations, NFS does not meet this minimum requirement. 8132 Consequently, ``TMPDIR`` cannot be on NFS. 8133 8134 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_HOST_TASK` 8135 This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 8136 building an SDK, which contains a cross-development environment. The 8137 packages specified by this variable are part of the toolchain set 8138 that runs on the :term:`SDKMACHINE`, and each 8139 package should usually have the prefix ``nativesdk-``. For example, 8140 consider the following command when building an SDK: 8141 :: 8142 8143 $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename 8144 8145 In this case, a default list of packages is 8146 set in this variable, but you can add additional packages to the 8147 list. See the 8148 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section 8149 in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible 8150 Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information. 8151 8152 For background information on cross-development toolchains in the 8153 Yocto Project development environment, see the 8154 ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`" 8155 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For 8156 information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the 8157 :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. 8158 8159 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` 8160 This variable defines the name used for the toolchain output. The 8161 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets 8162 the ``TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME`` variable as follows: 8163 :: 8164 8165 TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME ?= "${SDK_NAME}-toolchain-${SDK_VERSION}" 8166 8167 See 8168 the :term:`SDK_NAME` and 8169 :term:`SDK_VERSION` variables for additional 8170 information. 8171 8172 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_TARGET_TASK` 8173 This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 8174 it creates the target part of an SDK (i.e. the part built for the 8175 target hardware), which includes libraries and headers. Use this 8176 variable to add individual packages to the part of the SDK that runs 8177 on the target. See the 8178 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section 8179 in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible 8180 Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information. 8181 8182 For background information on cross-development toolchains in the 8183 Yocto Project development environment, see the 8184 ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`" 8185 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For 8186 information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the 8187 :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. 8188 8189 :term:`TOPDIR` 8190 The top-level :term:`Build Directory`. BitBake 8191 automatically sets this variable when you initialize your build 8192 environment using :ref:`structure-core-script`. 8193 8194 :term:`TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH` 8195 A sanitized version of :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. This 8196 variable is used where the architecture is needed in a value where 8197 underscores are not allowed, for example within package filenames. In 8198 this case, dash characters replace any underscore characters used in 8199 ``TARGET_ARCH``. 8200 8201 Do not edit this variable. 8202 8203 :term:`TUNE_ARCH` 8204 The GNU canonical architecture for a specific architecture (i.e. 8205 ``arm``, ``armeb``, ``mips``, ``mips64``, and so forth). BitBake uses 8206 this value to setup configuration. 8207 8208 ``TUNE_ARCH`` definitions are specific to a given architecture. The 8209 definitions can be a single static definition, or can be dynamically 8210 adjusted. You can see details for a given CPU family by looking at 8211 the architecture's ``README`` file. For example, the 8212 ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/README`` file in the 8213 :term:`Source Directory` provides information for 8214 ``TUNE_ARCH`` specific to the ``mips`` architecture. 8215 8216 ``TUNE_ARCH`` is tied closely to 8217 :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, which defines the target 8218 machine's architecture. The BitBake configuration file 8219 (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) sets ``TARGET_ARCH`` as follows: 8220 :: 8221 8222 TARGET_ARCH = "${TUNE_ARCH}" 8223 8224 The following list, which is by no means complete since architectures 8225 are configurable, shows supported machine architectures: 8226 8227 - arm 8228 - i586 8229 - x86_64 8230 - powerpc 8231 - powerpc64 8232 - mips 8233 - mipsel 8234 8235 :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` 8236 Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target 8237 system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8238 ``TUNE_ASARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8239 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8240 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the 8241 ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags 8242 for the x86 architecture as follows: 8243 :: 8244 8245 TUNE_ASARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-x32", "", d)}" 8246 8247 .. note:: 8248 8249 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8250 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8251 supply its own set of flags). 8252 8253 :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` 8254 Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target 8255 system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8256 ``TUNE_CCARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8257 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8258 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. 8259 8260 .. note:: 8261 8262 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8263 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8264 supply its own set of flags). 8265 8266 :term:`TUNE_FEATURES` 8267 Features used to "tune" a compiler for optimal use given a specific 8268 processor. The features are defined within the tune files and allow 8269 arguments (i.e. ``TUNE_*ARGS``) to be dynamically generated based on 8270 the features. 8271 8272 The OpenEmbedded build system verifies the features to be sure they 8273 are not conflicting and that they are supported. 8274 8275 The BitBake configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) defines 8276 ``TUNE_FEATURES`` as follows: 8277 :: 8278 8279 TUNE_FEATURES ??= "${TUNE_FEATURES_tune-${DEFAULTTUNE}}" 8280 8281 See the :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` variable for more information. 8282 8283 :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` 8284 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system. 8285 The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8286 ``TUNE_LDARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8287 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8288 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the 8289 ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags 8290 for the x86 architecture as follows: 8291 :: 8292 8293 TUNE_LDARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-m elf32_x86_64", "", d)}" 8294 8295 .. note:: 8296 8297 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8298 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8299 supply its own set of flags). 8300 8301 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` 8302 The package architecture understood by the packaging system to define 8303 the architecture, ABI, and tuning of output packages. The specific 8304 tune is defined using the "_tune" override as follows: 8305 :: 8306 8307 TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-tune = "tune" 8308 8309 These tune-specific package architectures are defined in the machine 8310 include files. Here is an example of the "core2-32" tuning as used in 8311 the ``meta/conf/machine/include/tune-core2.inc`` file: 8312 :: 8313 8314 TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-core2-32 = "core2-32" 8315 8316 :term:`TUNEABI` 8317 An underlying Application Binary Interface (ABI) used by a particular 8318 tuning in a given toolchain layer. Providers that use prebuilt 8319 libraries can use the ``TUNEABI``, 8320 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and 8321 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variables to check 8322 compatibility of tunings against their selection of libraries. 8323 8324 If ``TUNEABI`` is undefined, then every tuning is allowed. See the 8325 :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the variable is 8326 used. 8327 8328 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE` 8329 If set, the OpenEmbedded system ignores the 8330 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variable. 8331 Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the 8332 ``TUNEABI_OVERRIDE``, ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, and 8333 :term:`TUNEABI` variables to check compatibility of a 8334 tuning against their selection of libraries. 8335 8336 See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the 8337 variable is used. 8338 8339 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` 8340 A whitelist of permissible :term:`TUNEABI` values. If 8341 ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST`` is not set, all tunes are allowed. Providers 8342 that use prebuilt libraries can use the ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, 8343 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and ``TUNEABI`` 8344 variables to check compatibility of a tuning against their selection 8345 of libraries. 8346 8347 See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the 8348 variable is used. 8349 8350 :term:`TUNECONFLICTS[feature]` 8351 Specifies CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning features 8352 that conflict with feature. 8353 8354 Known tuning conflicts are specified in the machine include files in 8355 the :term:`Source Directory`. Here is an example from 8356 the ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/arch-mips.inc`` include file 8357 that lists the "o32" and "n64" features as conflicting with the "n32" 8358 feature: 8359 :: 8360 8361 TUNECONFLICTS[n32] = "o32 n64" 8362 8363 :term:`TUNEVALID[feature]` 8364 Specifies a valid CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning 8365 feature. The specified feature is stored as a flag. Valid features 8366 are specified in the machine include files (e.g. 8367 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc``). Here is an example 8368 from that file: 8369 :: 8370 8371 TUNEVALID[bigendian] = "Enable big-endian mode." 8372 8373 See the machine include files in the :term:`Source Directory` 8374 for these features. 8375 8376 :term:`UBOOT_CONFIG` 8377 Configures the :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` and can 8378 also define :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` for individual 8379 cases. 8380 8381 Following is an example from the ``meta-fsl-arm`` layer. :: 8382 8383 UBOOT_CONFIG ??= "sd" 8384 UBOOT_CONFIG[sd] = "mx6qsabreauto_config,sdcard" 8385 UBOOT_CONFIG[eimnor] = "mx6qsabreauto_eimnor_config" 8386 UBOOT_CONFIG[nand] = "mx6qsabreauto_nand_config,ubifs" 8387 UBOOT_CONFIG[spinor] = "mx6qsabreauto_spinor_config" 8388 8389 In this example, "sd" is selected as the configuration of the possible four for the 8390 ``UBOOT_MACHINE``. The "sd" configuration defines 8391 "mx6qsabreauto_config" as the value for ``UBOOT_MACHINE``, while the 8392 "sdcard" specifies the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` to use for the U-boot image. 8393 8394 For more information on how the ``UBOOT_CONFIG`` is handled, see the 8395 :ref:`uboot-config <ref-classes-uboot-config>` 8396 class. 8397 8398 :term:`UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS` 8399 Specifies the load address for the dtb image used by U-boot. During FIT 8400 image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in 8401 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify 8402 the load address to be used in 8403 creating the dtb sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image. 8404 8405 :term:`UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS` 8406 Specifies the load address for the dtbo image used by U-boot. During FIT 8407 image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in 8408 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the load address to be used in 8409 creating the dtbo sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image. 8410 8411 :term:`UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT` 8412 Specifies the entry point for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image 8413 creation, the ``UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is passed as a 8414 command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility. 8415 8416 :term:`UBOOT_LOADADDRESS` 8417 Specifies the load address for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image 8418 creation, the ``UBOOT_LOADADDRESS`` variable is passed as a 8419 command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility. 8420 8421 :term:`UBOOT_LOCALVERSION` 8422 Appends a string to the name of the local version of the U-Boot 8423 image. For example, assuming the version of the U-Boot image built 8424 was "2013.10", the full version string reported by U-Boot would be 8425 "2013.10-yocto" given the following statement: 8426 :: 8427 8428 UBOOT_LOCALVERSION = "-yocto" 8429 8430 :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` 8431 Specifies the value passed on the ``make`` command line when building 8432 a U-Boot image. The value indicates the target platform 8433 configuration. You typically set this variable from the machine 8434 configuration file (i.e. ``conf/machine/machine_name.conf``). 8435 8436 Please see the "Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type" 8437 section in the U-Boot README for valid values for this variable. 8438 8439 :term:`UBOOT_MAKE_TARGET` 8440 Specifies the target called in the ``Makefile``. The default target 8441 is "all". 8442 8443 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS` 8444 Options for the device tree compiler passed to mkimage '-D' 8445 feature while creating FIT image in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class. 8446 8447 :term:`UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT` 8448 Specifies the entrypoint for the RAM disk image. 8449 During FIT image creation, the 8450 ``UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is used 8451 in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the 8452 entrypoint to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for 8453 the FIT image. 8454 8455 :term:`UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS` 8456 Specifies the load address for the RAM disk image. 8457 During FIT image creation, the 8458 ``UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used 8459 in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the 8460 load address to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for 8461 the FIT image. 8462 8463 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_ENABLE` 8464 Enable signing of FIT image. The default value is "0". 8465 8466 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` 8467 Location of the directory containing the RSA key and 8468 certificate used for signing FIT image. 8469 8470 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` 8471 The name of keys used for signing U-boot FIT image stored in 8472 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory. For e.g. dev.key key and dev.crt 8473 certificate stored in :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory will have 8474 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` set to "dev". 8475 8476 :term:`UBOOT_SUFFIX` 8477 Points to the generated U-Boot extension. For example, ``u-boot.sb`` 8478 has a ``.sb`` extension. 8479 8480 The default U-Boot extension is ``.bin`` 8481 8482 :term:`UBOOT_TARGET` 8483 Specifies the target used for building U-Boot. The target is passed 8484 directly as part of the "make" command (e.g. SPL and AIS). If you do 8485 not specifically set this variable, the OpenEmbedded build process 8486 passes and uses "all" for the target during the U-Boot building 8487 process. 8488 8489 :term:`UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST` 8490 Specifies a list of options that, if reported by the configure script 8491 as being invalid, should not generate a warning during the 8492 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. Normally, invalid 8493 configure options are simply not passed to the configure script (e.g. 8494 should be removed from :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or 8495 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`). 8496 However, common options, for example, exist that are passed to all 8497 configure scripts at a class level that might not be valid for some 8498 configure scripts. It follows that no benefit exists in seeing a 8499 warning about these options. For these cases, the options are added 8500 to ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST``. 8501 8502 The configure arguments check that uses 8503 ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST`` is part of the 8504 :ref:`insane <ref-classes-insane>` class and is only enabled if the 8505 recipe inherits the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` class. 8506 8507 :term:`UPDATERCPN` 8508 For recipes inheriting the 8509 :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class, ``UPDATERCPN`` 8510 specifies the package that contains the initscript that is enabled. 8511 8512 The default value is "${PN}". Given that almost all recipes that 8513 install initscripts package them in the main package for the recipe, 8514 you rarely need to set this variable in individual recipes. 8515 8516 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX` 8517 You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream 8518 source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If 8519 the recipe source code is provided from Git repositories, the 8520 OpenEmbedded build system determines the latest upstream version by 8521 picking the latest tag from the list of all repository tags. 8522 8523 You can use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX`` variable to provide a 8524 regular expression to filter only the relevant tags should the 8525 default filter not work correctly. 8526 :: 8527 8528 UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX = "git_tag_regex" 8529 8530 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX` 8531 Use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX`` variable to specify a different 8532 regular expression instead of the default one when the package 8533 checking system is parsing the page found using 8534 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`. 8535 :: 8536 8537 UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX = "package_regex" 8538 8539 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI` 8540 You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream 8541 source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If 8542 the source code is provided from tarballs, the latest version is 8543 determined by fetching the directory listing where the tarball is and 8544 attempting to find a later tarball. When this approach does not work, 8545 you can use ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`` to provide a different URI that 8546 contains the link to the latest tarball. 8547 :: 8548 8549 UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI = "recipe_url" 8550 8551 :term:`USE_DEVFS` 8552 Determines if ``devtmpfs`` is used for ``/dev`` population. The 8553 default value used for ``USE_DEVFS`` is "1" when no value is 8554 specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_DEVFS`` to "0" for a 8555 statically populated ``/dev`` directory. 8556 8557 See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:selecting a device manager`" section in 8558 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information on how to 8559 use this variable. 8560 8561 :term:`USE_VT` 8562 When using 8563 :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`, 8564 determines whether or not to run a 8565 `getty <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ on any 8566 virtual terminals in order to enable logging in through those 8567 terminals. 8568 8569 The default value used for ``USE_VT`` is "1" when no default value is 8570 specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_VT`` to "0" in the 8571 machine configuration file for machines that do not have a graphical 8572 display attached and therefore do not need virtual terminal 8573 functionality. 8574 8575 :term:`USER_CLASSES` 8576 A list of classes to globally inherit. These classes are used by the 8577 OpenEmbedded build system to enable extra features (e.g. 8578 ``buildstats``, ``image-mklibs``, and so forth). 8579 8580 The default list is set in your ``local.conf`` file: 8581 :: 8582 8583 USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink" 8584 8585 For more information, see 8586 ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 8587 8588 :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` 8589 If set to ``error``, forces the OpenEmbedded build system to produce 8590 an error if the user identification (``uid``) and group 8591 identification (``gid``) values are not defined in any of the files 8592 listed in :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and 8593 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES`. If set to 8594 ``warn``, a warning will be issued instead. 8595 8596 The default behavior for the build system is to dynamically apply 8597 ``uid`` and ``gid`` values. Consequently, the 8598 ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable is by default not set. If you plan 8599 on using statically assigned ``gid`` and ``uid`` values, you should 8600 set the ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable in your ``local.conf`` 8601 file as follows: 8602 :: 8603 8604 USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC = "error" 8605 8606 Overriding the 8607 default behavior implies you are going to also take steps to set 8608 static ``uid`` and ``gid`` values through use of the 8609 :term:`USERADDEXTENSION`, 8610 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES`, and 8611 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables. 8612 8613 .. note:: 8614 8615 There is a difference in behavior between setting 8616 ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` to ``error`` and setting it to ``warn``. 8617 When it is set to ``warn``, the build system will report a warning for 8618 every undefined ``uid`` and ``gid`` in any recipe. But when it is set 8619 to ``error``, it will only report errors for recipes that are actually 8620 built. 8621 This saves you from having to add static IDs for recipes that you 8622 know will never be built. 8623 8624 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` 8625 Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static group 8626 identification (``gid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system 8627 adds a group to the system during package installation. 8628 8629 When applying static group identification (``gid``) values, the 8630 OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a 8631 ``files/group`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the 8632 variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file: 8633 :: 8634 8635 8636 USERADD_GID_TABLES = "files/group" 8637 8638 .. note:: 8639 8640 Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids" 8641 causes the build system to use static ``gid`` values. 8642 8643 :term:`USERADD_PACKAGES` 8644 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 8645 this variable specifies the individual packages within the recipe 8646 that require users and/or groups to be added. 8647 8648 You must set this variable if the recipe inherits the class. For 8649 example, the following enables adding a user for the main package in 8650 a recipe: 8651 :: 8652 8653 USERADD_PACKAGES = "${PN}" 8654 8655 .. note:: 8656 8657 It follows that if you are going to use the ``USERADD_PACKAGES`` 8658 variable, you need to set one or more of the :term:`USERADD_PARAM`, 8659 :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM`, or :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` variables. 8660 8661 :term:`USERADD_PARAM` 8662 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 8663 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should pass to 8664 the ``useradd`` command if you add a user to the system when the 8665 package is installed. 8666 8667 Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe: 8668 :: 8669 8670 USERADD_PARAM_${PN} = "--system --home ${localstatedir}/lib/dbus \ 8671 --no-create-home --shell /bin/false \ 8672 --user-group messagebus" 8673 8674 For information on the 8675 standard Linux shell command ``useradd``, see 8676 http://linux.die.net/man/8/useradd. 8677 8678 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` 8679 Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static user 8680 identification (``uid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system 8681 adds a user to the system during package installation. 8682 8683 When applying static user identification (``uid``) values, the 8684 OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a 8685 ``files/passwd`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the 8686 variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file: 8687 :: 8688 8689 USERADD_UID_TABLES = "files/passwd" 8690 8691 .. note:: 8692 8693 Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids" 8694 causes the build system to use static ``uid`` values. 8695 8696 :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` 8697 When set to "useradd-staticids", causes the OpenEmbedded build system 8698 to base all user and group additions on a static ``passwd`` and 8699 ``group`` files found in :term:`BBPATH`. 8700 8701 To use static user identification (``uid``) and group identification 8702 (``gid``) values, set the variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` 8703 file: USERADDEXTENSION = "useradd-staticids" 8704 8705 .. note:: 8706 8707 Setting this variable to use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` 8708 values causes the OpenEmbedded build system to employ the 8709 :ref:`ref-classes-useradd` class. 8710 8711 If you use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` information, you must also 8712 specify the ``files/passwd`` and ``files/group`` files by setting the 8713 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and 8714 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables. 8715 Additionally, you should also set the 8716 :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` variable. 8717 8718 :term:`VOLATILE_LOG_DIR` 8719 Specifies the persistence of the target's ``/var/log`` directory, 8720 which is used to house postinstall target log files. 8721 8722 By default, ``VOLATILE_LOG_DIR`` is set to "yes", which means the 8723 file is not persistent. You can override this setting by setting the 8724 variable to "no" to make the log directory persistent. 8725 8726 :term:`WARN_QA` 8727 Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as 8728 warnings by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in 8729 your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you 8730 can control with this variable, see the 8731 ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section. 8732 8733 :term:`WKS_FILE` 8734 Specifies the location of the Wic kickstart file that is used by the 8735 OpenEmbedded build system to create a partitioned image 8736 (image\ ``.wic``). For information on how to create a partitioned 8737 image, see the 8738 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 8739 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For details on 8740 the kickstart file format, see the ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" Chapter. 8741 8742 :term:`WKS_FILE_DEPENDS` 8743 When placed in the recipe that builds your image, this variable lists 8744 build-time dependencies. The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is only 8745 applicable when Wic images are active (i.e. when 8746 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains entries related 8747 to Wic). If your recipe does not create Wic images, the variable has 8748 no effect. 8749 8750 The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is similar to the 8751 :term:`DEPENDS` variable. When you use the variable in 8752 your recipe that builds the Wic image, dependencies you list in the 8753 ``WIC_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable are added to the ``DEPENDS`` variable. 8754 8755 With the ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable, you have the possibility to 8756 specify a list of additional dependencies (e.g. native tools, 8757 bootloaders, and so forth), that are required to build Wic images. 8758 Following is an example: 8759 :: 8760 8761 WKS_FILE_DEPENDS = "some-native-tool" 8762 8763 In the 8764 previous example, some-native-tool would be replaced with an actual 8765 native tool on which the build would depend. 8766 8767 :term:`WORKDIR` 8768 The pathname of the work directory in which the OpenEmbedded build 8769 system builds a recipe. This directory is located within the 8770 :term:`TMPDIR` directory structure and is specific to 8771 the recipe being built and the system for which it is being built. 8772 8773 The ``WORKDIR`` directory is defined as follows: 8774 :: 8775 8776 ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR} 8777 8778 The actual directory depends on several things: 8779 8780 - :term:`TMPDIR`: The top-level build output directory 8781 - :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`: The target system identifier 8782 - :term:`PN`: The recipe name 8783 - :term:`EXTENDPE`: The epoch - (if :term:`PE` is not specified, which 8784 is usually the case for most recipes, then `EXTENDPE` is blank) 8785 - :term:`PV`: The recipe version 8786 - :term:`PR`: The recipe revision 8787 8788 As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder name 8789 ``poky``, a default Build Directory at ``poky/build``, and a 8790 ``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system. Furthermore, suppose 8791 your recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0-r0.bb``. In this case, the work 8792 directory the build system uses to build the package would be as 8793 follows: 8794 :: 8795 8796 poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0 8797 8798 :term:`XSERVER` 8799 Specifies the packages that should be installed to provide an X 8800 server and drivers for the current machine, assuming your image 8801 directly includes ``packagegroup-core-x11-xserver`` or, perhaps 8802 indirectly, includes "x11-base" in 8803 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. 8804 8805 The default value of ``XSERVER``, if not specified in the machine 8806 configuration, is "xserver-xorg xf86-video-fbdev xf86-input-evdev". 8807 8808